PT Cruiser: Owner'S Manual Sedan/Convertible

2008 PT Cruiser Sedan/Convertible
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
PT Cruiser
Sedan/Convertible
81-026-0844 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or op-
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor. tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL description of features and equipment that are no longer
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
accidents. disregard any features and equipment described in this
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood manual that are not on this vehicle.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
WARNING!
ously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2007 Chrysler LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the table of contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
complete listing of all subjects.
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the Consult the following table for a description of the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. this owner’s manual:
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures that could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire manual you may miss important infor-
mation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title. Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
m Sentry Keyt — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Sentry Keyt Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Child Protection Door Lock System —
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
m Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .18
m Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate — If Equipped ▫ To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .33
With Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .26
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .27
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .37
m Remote Keyless Entry (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . .30
m Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Opening The Liftgate While The Security Alarm
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Is Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ To Unlatch The Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 m Deck Lid (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Power Deck Lid Release (Convertible) . . . . . . . .39
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
m Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlertt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
m Emergency Deck Lid Release Latch
(Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .54
2
m Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 ▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Auto Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Rear Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
m Occupant Restraints (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
m Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure . .88
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure . .52
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt
(BeltAlertt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 115 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS IGNITION KEY REMOVAL

The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key Automatic Transaxle
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask knob push button has returned to the out position. Turn the 2
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key and
place. cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Positions
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
CAUTION!
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the when leaving the vehicle unattended.
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. Manual Transaxle—If Equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
WARNING! key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a LOCKING DOORS WITH A KEY
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
ignition. A child could operate power windows, key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
other controls, or move the vehicle. lubrication.
KEY-IN-IGNITION REMINDER unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/

Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition, Immobilizer Light will come on for three seconds imme-
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key. diately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this indicates a 2
problem with the electronics.
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function. If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
SENTRY KEYT — IF EQUIPPED vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System prevents unautho- being shut off after two seconds of running.
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after two seconds of Keep in mind that a key, which has not been pro-
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This grammed is also considered an invalid key even if it is
system utilizes ignition keys, which have an electronic cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start normal vehicle operation, (the vehicle has been running
and operate the vehicle. for longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System does not need to be the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic as possible.
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
NOTE: Replacement Keys

• The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System is not compat-
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
ible with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
a Sentry Keyt has been programmed to a vehicle, it
security protection.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the CAUTION!
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
against the ignition key being used when starting the lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have with a four digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. This PIN is required for replacement of keys by an
authorized dealer. Duplication of keys must be per-
formed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Keyt Immobilizer 3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 15
dealer. seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
Sentry KeyT Programming
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will 2
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
position and remove the second key.
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure: 4. Insert a blank Sentry Keyt into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 60
1. Cut the additional Sentry Keyt Transponder blank(s)
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
the ignition switch to the “ON” position for at least three the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds
seconds, but no longer than 15-seconds. Then, turn the and then turn off.
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the
The new Sentry Keyt has been programmed. The Key-
first key.
less Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during
this procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a
total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed Sentry
Keyt, contact your dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
have all remaining keys erased from the systems Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro- out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at more than one—half turn in either direction and the key
the time of service to be reprogrammed. is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
General Information If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
The Sentry Keyt system complies with FCC rules part 15 Wheel:
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
subject to the following conditions: down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
engages.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
received, including interference that may cause undes-
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
ired operation.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage

the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it. 2
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and the brake pedal
is depressed.
DOOR LOCKS
Door Lock Plunger
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from WARNING!
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press this
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key switch to lock or unlock the doors.
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Lock Switch
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
door locks if all of the following conditions are met: following procedure:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled. 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2
2. The transmission is in gear. 2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
3. All doors are closed.
position.
4. The throttle is pressed.
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power programming.
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Auto Unlock
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Pro- power door locks if:
grammable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
tion Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details. 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK. 3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. The driver door is opened.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
features in accordance with local laws.
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM — IF
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
EQUIPPED
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
rear seat, the rear doors have the “child-protection” door
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto lock system.
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
To use the system, open each rear door and move the
the following procedure:
control UP to engage. When the system on a door is
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition. engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
unlocked position.
back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened 2
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Child Lock Control

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (SEDAN) NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
TO UNLOCK THE DOORS AND LIFTGATE:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the keyfob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
Three Button Key
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
minimum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
vehicle to activate the system.
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
following steps: Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button 2
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure: 5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
keyfob. TO LOCK THE DOORS AND LIFTGATE — IF
EQUIPPED WITH POWER OPTIONS:
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
hold the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
indicate that this feature has changed.
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps
3. Release both buttons at the same time. With Lock” feature can be turned on or off. On electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles re-
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
fer to “Personal Settings” in the “Electronic Vehicle
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
steps:
The panic alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
1. Press the LOCK button for four to ten seconds. turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons. NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce-
the system.
dure.
TO TURN OFF “FLASH LIGHTS WITH LOCK”:
PANIC ALARM
The panic mode flashes the park lights, and sounds the NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
horn for about three minutes or until the alarm is turned turned on or off. On Electronic Vehicle Information
off. Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to 9Personal Set-
tings9 in the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC -
Using The Panic Alarm:
equipped vehicles perform the following steps:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one 1. Press the UNLOCK button for four to ten seconds.
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four TO PROGRAM ADDITIONAL TRANSMITTERS:
seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons. Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two keyfob transmitters programmed only for that ve-
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the
hicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your 2
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
keyfob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
key removed.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
to reprogram them for your vehicle.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to Use the Following procedure to program additional key
deactivate the Security Alarm. fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Keyt:
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be 1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the 12. Repeat steps eight through ten to program up to six
engine. additional fobs.
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the keyfob. 13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds, 14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
also press the PANIC button within six seconds. seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must contact your dealer for details.
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
GENERAL INFORMATION
heard.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously. following conditions:
9. A single chime will be heard. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
release the UNLOCK button on the fob. received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
11. A single chime will be heard.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- 1. If the keyfob is equipped with a screw, remove the
proved by the party responsible for compliance could screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during 2
removal.
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
TRANSMITTER BATTERY SERVICE
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (CONVERTIBLE)
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE: If the keyfob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
Four-Button Transmitter
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
open the deck lid from distances of 23–50 feet (7–15
meters) using a transmitter. You don’t have to point the
transmitter at the vehicle to activate the system. Each
vehicle comes with two transmitters.
TO UNLOCK THE DOORS: The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the keyfob upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock following procedure:
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
2
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
keyfob.
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the 2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to seconds, but not longer than ten seconds, then press and
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under hold the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information indicate that this feature has changed.
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
following steps: will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce-
dure.
TO LOCK THE DOORS:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to TO UNLATCH THE DECK LID:
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the Press the “Rear Release” button twice to unlatch the deck
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If lid.
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps
PANIC ALARM
With Lock” feature can be turned on or off. On electronic
The panic mode flashes the park lights, and sounds the
vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles re-
horn for about three minutes or until the alarm is turned
fer to “Personal Settings” in the “Electronic Vehicle
off.
Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On
non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following Using The Panic Alarm:
steps: To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
1. Press the LOCK button for four to ten seconds.
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds), headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons. on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you 3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater. keyfob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
key removed. 2
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
the system. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
TO TURN OFF “FLASH LIGHTS WITH LOCK”:
deactivate the Security Alarm.
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to 9Personal Settings9 in
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped TO PROGRAM ADDITIONAL TRANSMITTERS:
vehicles perform the following steps:
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec-
1. Press the UNLOCK button for four to ten seconds. tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instru-
ment cluster, the transmitters may also be programmed
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four
through the EVIC display.
seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
Up to eight transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle. each transmitter to be programmed. You will hear a chime
To obtain additional transmitters, contact your authorized when a transmitter has been successfully programmed.
dealer. To program a transmitter (within 23–50 ft/7–15 m of
GENERAL INFORMATION
the vehicle), perform the following procedure:
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and
1. Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
vehicle including any transmitters that are currently the following two conditions:
programmed.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. Enter Program Mode: Turn the ignition to the ON
position, and using a currently programmed transmitter; 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
press and hold the 9Unlock9 button on the transmitter. received, including interference that may cause undes-
Continue to hold the “Unlock” button, wait at least four ired operation.
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the If your Remote Keyless Entryt fails to operate from a
PANIC button for at least one second. Release both normal distance, check for these two conditions:
buttons simultaneously.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
3. Program Each Transmitter: All transmitters to be used batteries is from one to two years
with your vehicle must be programmed as follows:
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
Press and release the 9Lock9 and 9Unlock9 buttons simulta- tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
neously, followed by a press and release of ANY button on
TRANSMITTER BATTERY SERVICE

ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
2
The recommended replacement battery is the Panasonict
CR2032 or equivalent.
1. Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar
object. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket
material during removal.
Separating Transmitter Halves

2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. Reassemble the transmitter case. Snap the halves
together and test transmitter operation.
NOTE: If the keyfob is equipped with a screw, reinstall To set the alarm:
and tighten the screw until snug.
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED of the vehicle.
The system monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition 2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,
switch for unauthorized operation. or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all doors.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for 3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes the horn will rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and the arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
indicator light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
lights will flash for another 15 minutes. unlocked by either the power door lock switch or the
If the monitored system, which triggered the alarm is remote keyless entry transmitter, the system will auto-
deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until three matically disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored flash slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
system, which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the
alarm has been on for three minutes the alarm will shut
off immediately.
To disarm the system:

Unlock a front door using the Keyless Entry Transmitter.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm
the system. A valid key is one that is programmed to that
2
particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the system, an
invalid key will trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds three times when you unlock a front
door using the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the alarm has
been activated. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override Door Lock Plunger
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
LIFTGATE (SEDAN)
manual door lock plunger.
The liftgate can be unlocked by pressing twice on the
remote keyless entry button or by activating the power
door lock switches located on the front doors.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release Opening The Liftgate While the Security Alarm Is
touch pad located on the backside of the liftgate handle Activated
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. Unlocking the liftgate with the remote keyless entry
transmitter will allow access to the liftgate without
sounding or disarming the security alarm system. Once
the liftgate is closed, it will again be monitored by the
security alarm system.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-

ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Liftgate Handle • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. automatic transmission, the power deck lid release
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- switch is disabled if the doors are locked, or the trans-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when mission is out of PARK.
opening the liftgate in cold weather. 2
WARNING!
DECK LID (CONVERTIBLE)
Gas props support the deck lid in the open position. • Driving with the deck lid open can allow poison-
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
opening the deck lid in cold weather. the deck lid closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
POWER DECK LID RELEASE (Convertible)
You can open the deck lid by pressing the Remote • If you are required to drive with the deck lid open,
Keyless Entry Button or from inside the vehicle, using the make sure that all windows are closed, and the
switch located inside the glove box. On vehicles climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
equipped with a manual transmission, the power deck DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
lid release switch is disabled if the doors are locked, or if
vehicle speed exceeds 0 mph (0 km/h), or when the
clutch pedal is depressed. On vehicles equipped with an
EMERGENCY SEAT BACK RELEASE (SEDAN) seat back can be unlatched by pulling down on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the left rear seat back
WARNING! latching mechanism.
Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate

area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 (Top) or
position 2 (Middle), either by climbing into the
liftgate from outside, or through the inside of the
vehicle. Always close the liftgate when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the liftgate area, young chil-
dren may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the liftgate,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
As a security measure, a Seat Back Emergency Release Emergency Seat Back Release
lever is built into the left side rear seat back latching
Once unlatched the seat back can be pushed forward to
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
gain access into the interior of the vehicle.
inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in
position 1 (Top) or position 2 (Middle), the left side rear
NOTE: Make sure that the elastic loop is around the As a security measure, an emergency deck lid release
emergency release handle at all times. If the handle is lever is built into the deck lid latching mechanism. In the
pulled downward, entirely through the elastic loop, the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
handle will not return to its original position and the seat trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in- 2
back may not operate properly. the-dark lever attached to the deck lid latching mecha-
nism. See following picture.
EMERGENCY DECK LID RELEASE LATCH
(CONVERTIBLE)
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,

either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
deck lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke. Emergency Deck Lid Release Handle
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the instru-
ment panel above the radio. The top left switch controls
the left front window and the top right switch controls
the right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear window and
the lower right switch controls the right rear window.
The sedan has a window lock switch, located between the
window switches allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located at the back of the center floor
console.
Power Window Switches
The convertible has an 9All windows up9 and 9All
windows down,9 switch located between the window
switches instead of the lock switch.
REAR WINDOW SWITCHES

WARNING!
There are also rear passenger window switches (sedan
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in only) located at the rear of the center console.
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- 2
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTO DOWN FEATURE

The driver’s and passenger’s front window switches
have an auto down feature. Press the window switch past
the detent, release, and the window will go down auto-
matically. Press the switch a second time in either direc-
tion to stop the window. Power Rear Window Switches Sedans
To open the window part way, press the window switch

part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
WIND BUFFETING • Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of seat belts.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
• Knee Impact Blocker panels for front seat occupants.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain • Supplemental front seat mounted side Head/Thorax
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- airbags for both the driver and front passenger (if
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with equipped).
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
• Front seat belt retractors that incorporate pretension-
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
ers to enhance occupant protection by managing oc-
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
cupant energy during an impact event.
minimize the buffeting.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (SEDAN) seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature also, can
Some of the most important safety features in your be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include:
Please pay close attention to the information in this
• Front and rear seat belts for all passengers section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
• Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
WARNING!
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of 2
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are be belted at all times.
buckled up properly. LAP/SHOULDER BELTS
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
far away from home or on your own street. shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING! WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people belts are designed to go around the large bones of
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- your body. These are the strongest parts of your
ously injured or killed. body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
belts. suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
using a seat belt properly. wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
WARNING!
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
Two people should never be belted into a single seat the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
belt. People belted together can crash into one an- necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. 2
other in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more WARNING!
than one person, no matter what their size.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and are meant to be used together.
adjust the seat.
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-

ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
Latch Plate likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt 2
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Removing Slack From Belt

WARNING! WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your too high on your body, possibly causing internal
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos- injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
sible and keep it snug. nearest you.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision • A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
your dealer and have it fixed. belt snugly.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
will withdraw any slack in the belt. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt can not be pulled
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and out, check that the rear seat back is fully latched.
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system • If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear
2
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. center lap/shoulder belt still can not be pulled out, the
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
etc.). has been returned back into the retractor.
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock-Out

This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seat back is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seat back is not fully latched.
2. At about six to twelve inches (15 to 30 cm) above the

WARNING!
latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
lockout feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in plate.
the fully upright and locked position when occupied. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
If the rear seat back is not fully upright and locked The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled latch plate.
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your dealer for service. Failure to follow 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
this warning could result in serious or fatal injury. folded webbing.
ADJUSTABLE UPPER SHOULDER SEAT BELT
ANCHORAGE
LAP/SHOULDER SEAT BELT UNTWISTING In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
PROCEDURE upward or downward to position the belt away from
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage button to
shoulder belt. release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the position that serves you best.
anchor point.
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. 2
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that sioners, both must be replaced.
it is locked in position.
ENHANCED SEAT BELT REMINDER SYSTEM NOTE:

(BELTALERTT) • The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) can be
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer.
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
• DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt).
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The If the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) is deacti-
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle vated, the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to
their seat belts. If the driver unbuckles the seat belt while illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened.
the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime will be heard
SEAT BELTS AND PREGNANT WOMEN
and, the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) will
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) will be reac-
tivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
AIRBAG
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front 2
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Panel SRS Features

1 — Driver Airbag 3 — Passenger Knee Blocker
2 — Passenger Airbag 4 — Driver Knee Blocker
Head/Thorax airbags (if equipped) are located inside the

driver and front passenger seats, and their covers are also
labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee impact

blocker panels in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee blocker
panel such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band
radios etc.
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.

WARNING!
Head/Thorax side airbags also work with seat belts to
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag improve occupant protection.
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
2
damage the airbags and you could be injured of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
because the airbags are not there to protect you. severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are Head/Thorax airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat- triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
ing. types of collisions, both the front seat Head/Thorax
• If your vehicle is equipped with Head/Thorax airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions where
airbags, do not use accessory seat covers or place the airbags work, you need to wear the seat belts to keep
objects between you and the airbags; the perfor- you in the right position for the airbags to protect you
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects properly.
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to 9Occupant Classification System9
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the instrument panel knee impact blockers to provide
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
“child9 category. This could be a child, a teenager, or even children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
a small adult. their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the You should read the instructions provided with your
risk of harm from a deploying airbag. child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride 2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts
buckled up in a rear seat. properly.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag. back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to inflate.
infants in that position.
4. If your vehicle has supplemental side and or thorax
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the airbags, do not lean against the door, airbags will inflate
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should forcefully into the space between you and the door.
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under 9If
You Need Assistance9 in Section 9 of this manual.
The front airbag system consists of the following:

WARNING!
• Occupant Restraint Controller
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work • Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If equipped) 2
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In • Airbag Warning Light
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have • Driver and Front Passenger Airbag
airbags. • Front Seat Mounted Head/Thorax Airbags (if
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument equipped)
panel during front airbag deployment could cause • Steering Wheel and Column
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach • Instrument Panel
the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Driver and Front Passenger Knee Impact Blockers
• Seat airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
• Front Acceleration Sensors
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat. • Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
The Head/Thorax airbag system (if equipped) consists also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
of the following: size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
• AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system) The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
• Front Seat— side mounted Head/Thorax Airbags — if
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
equipped
items listed above except the steering wheel and
• Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag column, and knee blocker panels. If the key is in the
system) OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
• Side impact sensors
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
How The Airbag System Works
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de- panel for six to eight seconds for a self-check
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation when the ignition is first turned on. After the
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The
PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer to
9Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light9 in this to their full size. The front airbags fully inflate in about
section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of 50 milliseconds. This is only about half of the time it
the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either takes you to blink your eyes. The front airbags then
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and 2
if the light comes on again after initial start up. front passenger. The driver’s and passenger’s front
airbag gas is vented through holes in the sides of the
WARNING! airbag. In this way the front airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you • The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on (an amber light located in the center of the instrument
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
drive, have the airbag system checked right away. front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indica-
tor lamp illuminates the words 9PASS AIRBAG OFF9
to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate
• When the front airbag control module detects a colli- during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
sion requiring the front airbags, it signals the inflator front passenger seat is empty or when very light
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to objects are placed on the seat, the passenger airbag
inflate the front airbags. The front airbag covers sepa- will not inflate even though the PAD indicator lamp is
rate and fold out of the way as the front airbags inflate not illuminated.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an

occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child re-
straints).
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light WARNING!

• The PAD indictor light should not be illu-
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
minated when an adult passenger is prop-
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause death
erly seated in the front passenger seat. In
or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.
this case, the airbag is ready to be inflated if
a collision requiring an airbag occurs.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and will not inflate.
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) System not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
Front Passenger Indicator Light Airbag Status the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
Adult OFF ON
properly and may result in the occupant being improp- 2
Child ON OFF erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
Grocery Bags, ON OFF does not touch anything placed on the second row of
Heavy Briefcases seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
and Other Rela- Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
tively Light Ob-
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
jects
Empty or Very OFF* OFF If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
Small Objects should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on. loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding If there is a fault present in the Airbag Warning Light (a
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight red light located in the center of the instrument cluster
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door directly in front of the driver) will be turned on. This
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
indicates that you should take the vehicle to an autho- may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
rized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the PAD fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
Indicator Light the Airbag Warning Light remains illu- The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
minated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged under the The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors, the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the lodged the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
object is removed, the fault will be automatically cleared through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
after a short period of time. way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right • The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator classifies the occupant into categories based on the
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates OCM communicates with the ORC. The ORC uses the
occupant category to determine whether the front
passenger airbag should be turned off. It also deter- In moderate to severe side collisions the inflating Head/
mines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision. Thorax airbag exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The Head/Thorax
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high 2
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
applied weight and transfers that information to the
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
OCM.
airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
• The Head/Thorax Side Airbags—If Equipped (SRS)
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
The ORC module determines if a side collision is
components in any way.
severe enough to require the Head/Thorax airbags to
inflate. The side airbag control module will not detect • Do not modify the front seat center console or center
roll over, front or rear collisions. position seat in any way.
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
START or ON positions. These include all of the items ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
listed under “The Head/Thorax side airbag system vehicle.
consists of the following”.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat

WARNING!
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopart. the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas- could result in death or serious injury to the front
tener be modified or replaced with any part except seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/ accident.
Mopart.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe col-
lision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to • As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
system. inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, 2
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
or all of the following may occur:
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra- see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The tions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING!

protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could
seat belt pretensioners, front passenger seat belt
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
retractor assembly and Occupant Classification Sys-
injured if the airbag system is not there to protect
tem, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
possible.
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
WARNING! WARNING!
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced • Do not place or hang any items such as add-on
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or video players on the front seat backs. The addi- 2
may not function properly if modifications are made. tional weight may cause the Occupant Classifica-
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any tion System to be unable to correctly classify the
advanced airbag system service. If your seat includ- right front occupant. This could allow the passen-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced ger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
in any way (including removal or loosening/ • You need proper knee impact protection in a
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer ap- equipment on or behind the knee blocker panel.
proved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
Airbag Light prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near-

You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following or near-deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise
immediately. unavailable.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on during the six to NOTE:
eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
on. sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
• The light remains on after the six to eight second
deployment.
interval.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
• The light comes on and remains on while driving.
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
record up to five - seconds of specific vehicle data
used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about
parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
addition to crash investigations initiated by identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be requested treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
and professional crash researchers, such as those associ- when: 2
ated with universities, and with hospital and insurance
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
organizations.
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company preserved
or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
DaimlerChrysler product
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
4. Otherwise required by law
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
maintained by the US government and various states.
the airbag system
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped) CHILD RESTRAINT

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
cycles and vehicle mileage)
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable) small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• Impact acceleration and angle
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
• Seatbelt status
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
• Brake status (service and parking brakes) statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
• Safety experts recommend that children ride

WARNING!
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant 2
required to hold even an infant on your lap could carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Both types of
become so great that you could not hold the child, no child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
matter how strong you are. The child and others shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your system.
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s • This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
size. installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
Infants And Small Children bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
child: vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than • The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
less than one year old. cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
injury or death to infants in this position.
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who portion.)
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
NOTE: For additional information refer to
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
www.nhtsa.gov or www.seatcheck.org.
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle

WARNING!
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for 2
collision. The child could be badly injured or weight and height limits.
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be not work when you need it.
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re- The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy- cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
fatal injury to the infant.
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
restraint: the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, please refer to • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in this section. vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
and cause serious personal injury.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
into the buckle with the release button facing out. through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
of the child restraint manufacture.
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position. NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
returned back into the retractor.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only in-
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor- stall the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Please refer to, Installing the Child Restraint System for
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system typical installation instructions. 2
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower and tether anchorages that are capable of
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use Latch Anchors
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child of reach of children. It is recommended that before
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
most older vehicles. child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
your child unattended in the vehicle.
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also Installing the Child Restraint System
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
of all of the available attachments provided with your manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
child restraint in any vehicle. but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped

with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
2
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

WARNING!
slouching can move the belt out of position.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
increased head motion and possible injury to the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether their back.
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend a collision.
over the front of the seat when their back is against the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (CONVERTIBLE) If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
Some of the most important safety features in your seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature also, can
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include: be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
• Front and rear seat belts for all passengers Please pay close attention to the information in this
2
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
• Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front possible.
seat belts.
WARNING!
• Knee Blocker panels for front seat occupants.
• Supplemental front seat mounted side Head/Thorax In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
airbags for both the driver and front passenger (if much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
equipped). up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
• Front seat belt retractors that incorporate pretension- Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
ers to enhance occupant protection by managing oc- buckled up properly.
cupant energy during an impact event.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
WARNING!
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the ously injured or killed.
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
LAP/SHOULDER BELTS belts.
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Shoulder Belts.
using a seat belt properly.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
WARNING! WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of belt. People belted together can crash into one an- 2
your body. These are the strongest parts of your other in an accident, hurting one another badly.
body and can take the forces of a collision the best. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make than one person, no matter what their size.
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas- 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
sengers safe, too. adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the 2
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
Latch Plate To Buckle increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt webbing guide should be used to improve
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. seat belt accessibility. The seat belt can be removed from
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to the guide to allow for easier access to the rear seats.
allow the belt to retract fully. 2
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assem-
blies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Seat Belt Webbing Guide Seat Belt Webbing Guide
NOTE: The manufacturer recommends that the seat belt

is routed through the seat belt webbing guide when
using the seat belt.
LAP/SHOULDER SEAT BELT UNTWISTING SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

PROCEDURE The seat belts for both front seating positions are
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
shoulder belt. remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
anchor point.
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
2. At about six to twelve inches (15 to 30 cm) above the including those in child restraints.
latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
plate.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
latch plate.
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
folded webbing. sioners, both must be replaced.
ENHANCED SEAT BELT REMINDER SYSTEM NOTE:

(BELTALERTT) • The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) can be
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer.
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
• DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating
2
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt).
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The If the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) is deacti-
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle vated, the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened.
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) will continue to
SEAT BELTS AND PREGNANT WOMEN
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt)
the best way to keep the baby safe.
will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Panel SRS Features

1 — Driver Airbag 3 — Passenger Knee Blocker
2 — Passenger Airbag 4 — Driver Knee Blocker
Head/Thorax airbags (if equipped) are located inside the

driver and front passenger seats, and their covers are also
labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
2
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee blocker

panel in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee blocker
panel such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band SRS Airbag Label
radios etc.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along

WARNING!
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag knee impact blocker panels to provide improved protec-
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may tion for the driver and front passenger.
damage the airbags and you could be injured The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
because the airbags are not there to protect you. of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat- Head/Thorax airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is
ing. triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
• If your vehicle is equipped with Head/Thorax types of collisions, both the front seat and Head/Thorax
airbags, do not use accessory seat covers or place airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions where
objects between you and the side airbags; the the airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in
performance could be adversely affected and/or the right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
objects could be pushed into you, causing serious NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
injury. when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to 9Occupant Classification System9
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
“child” category. This could be a child, a teenager, or children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
even a small adult. their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the You should read the instructions provided with your
2
risk of harm from a deploying airbag. child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride 2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts
buckled up in a rear seat. properly.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag. back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to inflate.
infants in that position.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against the
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be-
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should tween you and the door.
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under 9If
You Need Assistance9 in Section 9 of this manual.
The front airbag system consists of the following:

WARNING!
• Occupant Restraint Controller
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more • Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In • Airbag Warning Light
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all. • Driver Airbag
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags. • Passenger Airbag
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Front Seat Mounted Head/Thorax Airbags (if
panel during front airbag deployment could cause equipped)
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
• Steering Wheel and Column
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Instrument Panel
• If the vehicle has Head/Thorax airbags, they also • Driver and Front Passenger Knee Impact Blockers
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door.
Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
The Head/Thorax airbag system (if equipped) consists also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
of the following: size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
• AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system) The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
2
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
• Front Seat— side mounted Head/Thorax Airbags — if
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
equipped
items listed above except the steering wheel and
• Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag column, and knee impact blockers. If the key is in the
system) OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
• Side impact sensors
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
How The Airbag System Works
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de- panel for six to eight seconds for a self-check
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation when the ignition is first turned on. After the
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The
PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer to
9Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light9 in this units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of inflate the front airbags. The front airbag covers sepa-
the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either rate and fold out of the way as the front airbags inflate
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to their full size. The front airbags fully inflate in about
if the light comes on again after initial start up. 50 milliseconds. This is only about half of the time it
takes you to blink your eyes. The front airbags then
WARNING! quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s and passenger’s front
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel airbag gas is vented through holes in the sides of the
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you airbag. In this way the front airbags do not interfere
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on with your control of the vehicle.
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away. • The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indica-
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint. tor lamp illuminates the words 9PASS AIR BAG OFF9
to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate
• When the front airbag control module detects a colli- during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
sion requiring the front airbags, it signals the inflator front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
will not inflate even though the PAD indicator lamp is illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
not illuminated. is turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
2
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child re-
straints).
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light WARNING!

• The PAD indictor light should not be illu-
minated when teenagers, most children in a Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
forward facing child restraint or booster airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause death
seats, most children that can properly wear or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.
the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an adult passenger is
properly seated in the front passenger seat. In this
case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision
requiring an airbag occurs.
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) System not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
Front Passenger Indicator Light Airbag Status the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
Adult OFF ON
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
Child ON OFF erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
Grocery Bags, ON OFF does not touch anything placed on the second row of
Heavy Briefcases seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
and Other Rela- Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
tively Light Ob-
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
jects
Empty or Very OFF* OFF If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
Small Objects should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on. loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding If there is a fault present in the Airbag Warning Light (a
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight red light located in the center of the instrument cluster
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door directly in front of the driver) will be turned on. This
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
indicates that you should take the vehicle to an autho- may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
rized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the PAD fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. 2
Indicator Light the Airbag Warning Light remains illu- The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
minated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged under the The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors, the driver and front passenger. The driver’s and pas-
a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator senger’s front airbag gas is vented through holes in the
Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the lodged sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do not
object is removed, the fault will be automatically cleared interfere with your control of the vehicle.
after a short period of time.
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right classifies the occupant into categories based on the
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator OCM communicates with the ORC. The ORC uses the
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to occupant category to determine whether the front
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates passenger airbag should be turned off. It also deter-
mines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision.
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between Thorax Airbags exit through the seat seam into the space
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure between the occupant and the door. The Head/Thorax
applied weight and transfers that information to the airbags moves at a very high speed and with such a high
OCM. force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
• The Head/Thorax Airbag and Supplemental Re-
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
straint Systems are designed to activate only in certain
side collisions. The ORC module determines if a side The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
collision is severe enough to require the Head/Thorax
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
airbags to inflate. The side airbag control module will
components in any way.
not detect roll over, front or rear collisions.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the elec-
position seat in any way.
tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON positions. These include all of • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
the items listed under “The Side Airbag System”, on designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
vehicles equipped, consists of the following”. ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered, • Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating Head/ cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those If A Deployment Occurs
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar. The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe col-
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
lision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and 2
then immediately deflate.
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/ NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
Mopar. airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
WARNING!
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the or all of the following may occur:
front passenger seat assembly, its related components, • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a • It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
immediately. collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
WARNING!
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, seat belt pretensioners, front passenger seat belt
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat retractor assembly, and Occupant Classification Sys-
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, tem replaced and/or serviced by an authorized dealer
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your as soon as possible.
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!
WARNING! Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or 2
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could
may not function properly if modifications are made.
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
injured if the airbag system is not there to protect
advanced airbag system service. If your seat includ-
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
in any way (including removal or loosening/
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer ap-
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
proved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
side steps or running boards.
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

WARNING!
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on Airbag Light
video players on the right front passenger seat You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
back. The additional weight may cause the Occu- protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
pant Classification System to be unable to cor- designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
rectly classify the right front occupant. This could occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when immediately.
it is not desired.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on during the six to
• You need proper knee impact protection in a eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket on.
equipment on or behind the knee impact blocker
panels. • The light remains on after the six to eight second
interval.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who • The light comes on and remains on while driving.
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
Event Data Recorder (EDR) In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param- used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in 2
moment of airbag deployment, or near-deployment, and order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data addition to crash investigations initiated by
during and/or after air bag deployment or near- DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be requested
deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag by customers, insurance carriers, government officials,
deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavail- and professional crash researchers, such as those associ-
able. ated with universities, and with hospital and insurance
organizations.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica- DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
deployment. sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
maintained by the US government and various states.
the airbag system
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be • Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
cycles and vehicle mileage)
when:
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, • Impact acceleration and angle
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
• Seatbelt status
preserved
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler product • Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant • Engine control status (including engine speed)
4. Otherwise required by law • Transmission gear selection
• Cruise control status

WARNING!
• Traction/stability control status
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
• Tire pressure monitoring system status can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force 2
CHILD RESTRAINT required to hold even an infant on your lap could
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all become so great that you could not hold the child, no
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the matter how strong you are. The child and others
United States and all Canadian provinces require that could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. size.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Infants And Small Children
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in There are different sizes and types of restraints for
the rear seats, rather than in the front. children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant less than one year old.
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Both types of
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
system.
injury or death to infants in this position.
• This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the are older than one year. These child seats are also held
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be child restraint anchorage system.
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-

WARNING!
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they collision. The child could be badly injured or
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/ actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap • A rearward facing child restraint should only be
portion.) used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
NOTE: For additional information refer to ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
www.nhtsa.gov or www.seatcheck.org. fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle into the retractor, as the belt retracts, you will hear a
where you will use it, before you buy it. clicking sound. This indicates that the seat belt is now in
the automatic locking mode. Pull on the excess webbing
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Follow
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
the instructions of the child restraint manufacture.
weight and height limits.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
not work when you need it.
returned back into the retractor.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with seat belt
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
mode, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
use a locking clip.
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the into the buckle with the release button facing out.
latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and using the vehicle seat belt. Both rear seating positions
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect have exclusive lower anchorages located at the rear of the
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate seat cushion. They are round bars, part of the seat and
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle body structure, and are readily visible. In addition, there 2
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure, are two tether strap anchorages located behind the rear
try a different seating position. seat head form, in the convertible top storage area.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
Latch Anchors
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child of reach of children. It is recommended that before
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
most older vehicles. child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
your child unattended in the vehicle.
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also Installing the Child Restraint System
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
of all of the available attachments provided with your manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
child restraint in any vehicle. but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped

with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
2
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed over the center of the
head form and attached to the tether anchor, located
behind the rear seat head form, in the convertible top
storage area. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
NOTE: To gain access to the anchorages, locate the child Tether Strap Mounting
tether anchorage decals on the carpet behind the rear seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
head forms and use a small screwdriver to pry the carpet have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
flap open. The carpet flap is attached in two different tions that come with the child restraint system.
places.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

WARNING!
slouching can move the belt out of position.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
increased head motion and possible injury to the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether their back.
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend a collision.
over the front of the seat when their back is against the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
your vehicle. considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. 2
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 SAFETY TIPS
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Exhaust Gas
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. WARNING!
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
follow the safety tips below.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual. Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
MUST NEVER BE USED. out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
WARNING! retractor condition, replace the belt.
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate Airbag Light
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
DO NOT use the recirculation mode. turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Defroster
Vehicle Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Seat Belts the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, feel the air directed against the windshield.
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Fluid Leaks

The Vehicle Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake 2
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
corrected immediately.
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
m Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ To Lower The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ To Raise The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 138
▫ Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal And ▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
m Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
▫ Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 134 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . 135 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 ▫ Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Folding Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Tumbling Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Rear Seat Removal (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Power Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 165 m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 166 ▫ Map/Reading Lights (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped . . 167 ▫ Map/Reading Lights (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Driver’s Seat Back Tilt — If Equipped . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) — ▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 ▫ Programming HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 201
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ▫ Using HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 ▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkt
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 194
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 m Rear Shelf Panel— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 ▫ Position 1 (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
m Power Sunroof (Sedan Only) — If Equipped . . . . 204 ▫ Position 2 (Middle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 ▫ Position 3 (Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 ▫ Position 4 (Vertical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 ▫ Position 5 (Table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
m Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 m Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 208 m Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
m Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 ▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 217
m Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 ▫ Rear Wiper/Washer Switch (Sedan Models
Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin . . . . . . . 209
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Storage Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION To Lower The Top:

NOTE: Thoroughly dry the convertible top and top
WARNING!
storage area, prior to leaving the top lowered for an
The convertible top does not provide the structural extended period of time. This will help prevent possible
mildew build-up.
protection that a reinforced metal roof does, and the 3
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants of a vehicle in a collision. Therefore CAUTION!
it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts
To avoid damage to the convertible top or its compo-
at all times when riding in a convertible. Studies
nents, your vehicle is equipped with a feature that
have shown that it is generally safer to remain inside
prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10
a vehicle during a collision, than to be ejected from
mph (16 km/h).
the vehicle.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that To avoid damage to either the top or the rear window,
the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear selector check the top storage area at the rear of the vehicle
in the Park position (automatic transaxle) or in the interior to be sure that it is clear of debris or other
Neutral position (manual transaxle) before lowering items. Be sure that child seat flip up bars are lowered.
or raising the top. Do not use the top storage area for other storage
purposes.
CAUTION!
NOTE: When closing the convertible top all windows
Do not operate the convertible top with ice or snow will drop slightly from the full up position.
build-up on the top. Damage to the top may occur. 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. Release the top from the windshield header by pulling
down on the latch handle and turning the latch handle
clockwise until it stops.
the Power Top Switch lightly in the first detent position

will lower the windows slightly and the convertible top
to the full down position. Pressing and holding the
switch in the second detent position will lower all four
windows completely and the top to the full down posi-
tion. 3
Releasing Convertible Top Latches

3. Press the Power Top Switch to lower the top just
enough to disengage the top pins from the header, turn
the handle counterclockwise and raise the handle to the
stowed position.
NOTE: The Power Top Switch has two detent positions
Convertible Top Switch
for lowering the convertible top. Pressing and holding
4. Continue pressing the Power Top Switch until the To Raise The Top:
convertible top is lowered completely.
CAUTION!
5. Install the Convertible Top Boot Cover, if equipped.
Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If To avoid damage to the convertible top or its compo-
Equipped, in this section. nents, your vehicle is equipped with a feature that
prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10
CAUTION! mph (16 km/h).
Damage to the convertible top boot cover could result
if the latch handle is not completely closed when the
top is lowered. The convertible top boot cover cannot CAUTION!
be installed while the latch handle is open.
To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that
the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear selector
in the Park position (automatic transaxle) or in the
Neutral position (manual transaxle) before lowering
or raising the top.
1. Remove the convertible top boot cover, if equipped.

Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and Stor-
age, in this section.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position.
3. Press the Power Top Switch to raise the top. Before the 3
top reaches the windshield, open the latch handle and
turn the handle clockwise to open the latches. Press the
switch again to continue raising the top until the two pins
seat themselves in the windshield header.
NOTE: If the top is not latched right away, it may be
necessary to press the power top switch, UP or DOWN Engaging Convertible Top Latches
quickly, to align the pins to the windshield header.
5. Raise the latch handle into the stowed position.
4. Pull down on the latch handle and rotate it counter-
clockwise to engage the latches.
CAUTION!
Car top carriers, ski racks, etc., should not be attached

to the convertible top mechanism as they will dam-
age the top. Do not place objects on the convertible
top, in the top well or on the sport bar. Damage to the
convertible top may occur.
Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If

Equipped
1. With the top down and the convertible top latch Convertible Top Latch Handle
handle in the stowed position, lay the unfolded boot
cover across the convertible top.
2. Install the rear edge of the boot, first tucking the rear
edge of the boot under the rear and both sides of the rails.
Boot Laying Across Convertible Top

3. Pull the right and left boot arms forward and engage
both boot arm snaps. Make sure both snaps are fully
engaged.
Tucking Boot Under Rail
Engaging Boot Arm Snaps

4. Engage the boot center section retainer using the tabs 5. Tuck the rear flap of the boot in behind the Upper
provided. Moulding.
Engaging Boot Center Section Tucking In Rear Flap

Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and

Storage
1. Unsnap the snaps and remove the top cover boot.
2. Lay the boot cover flat with the center section retainer
facing the rear of the car.
Boot Removed And Laying Flat

3. First fold the left side of the boot cover to the middle
of the boot cover.
Folding Boot Cover Right Side
CAUTION!
Folding Boot Cover Left Side
4. Second fold the right side of the boot cover to the Do not lay heavy objects on top of the boot or lay the
middle, fitting it inside the left side of the boot cover and boot on top of sharp/pointy objects. Damage could
store it in the trunk or a dry secure area. occur to the boot.
CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE

If your vehicle is experiencing electrical failure (low
battery, etc.) and it is necessary to raise the convertible
top, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw, which
is found in the trunk under the convertible top storage
area.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops.
This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the
convertible top to be raised manually.
Bleeder Screw
3. Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins
4. Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches.
5. Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to
engage the latches.
6. Raise the handle into the stowed position.

7. Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by
turning the screw clockwise until it stops. Tighten the
screw securely.
NOTE: Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can 3
cause convertible top operating concerns.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
Engaging Convertible Top Latches
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
small control under the mirror to the night position Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
while set in the day position (toward windshield). inside mirror.
Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
Adjusting Rearview Mirror mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors — If Equipped

The power mirror switch is located to the left of the
steering column on the instrument panel. To adjust the
view in the outside mirrors, turn the rotary knob to the L
(Left), O (Center) or R (Right) position. After selecting the
mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the 3
mirror to move. Use the O (Center) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Power Mirror Switch

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped NOTE: The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use when the vehicle alarm is enabled.
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
NOTE: The passenger vanity mirror will become inop-
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
erable if left on for more than 10 minutes.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —

IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
Illuminated Vanity Mirror will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9 allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
for supported phones. with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the 3
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro- system and the control buttons that will enable you to
phone for private conversation. access the system.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32

names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your
Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone.
UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the UConnectt Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands- Operations

Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., structure. Voice commands are required after most
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service pro- specific command and then guided through the available
vider or the phone manufacturer for details. options.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ the voice on beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume or another prompt.
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
(right switch), if so equipped.
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from 9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
the UConnect™ system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
certain radios.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com- Cancel Command
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
combined form command into two voice commands: 9Cancel9 and you will be returned to the main menu.
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the However, in a few instances the system will take you
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a back to the previous menu.
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
3
sitting eight feet away from you.
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
Voice Command Tree your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
Help Command phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following for supported phones.
the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply following vehicle specific websites may also provide
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a that you have:
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
NOTE: • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to

• www.chrysler.com/uconnect give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
given a unique phone name.
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
pairing instructions: priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
9Setup Phone Pairing9 and follow the audible prompts. UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say 9Pair a
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
Phone9 and follow the audible prompts.
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number, system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
which you will later need to enter into your cellular. make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
need to remember this pin number after the initial Connectivity9).
pairing process.
Call/Dial by Saying a Number Call/Dial by Saying a Name

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9 “Dial” or Call.9
• System will prompt you to say the number you want • System will prompt you to say the name of the person
3
call. you want call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.” The phone • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
number that you enter must be of valid length and the name of the person you want to call. For example,
combination. Based on the Country in which the you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For book. Refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnect™
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long, Phonebook,9 to learn how to store a name in the
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest phonebook.
valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num- then dial the corresponding phone number, which
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the may appear in the display of certain radios.
display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
when vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
9Phonebook New Entry.9 four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
only in that language.
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or 9Robert9 Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
instead of 9Bob.9
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., when vehicle is not in motion.
9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, when vehicle is not in motion.
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
3
phonebook entry that you are editing.
9Phonebook Delete.9
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
return to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
number to a name entry that already exists in the from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature. entry and say 9Delete.9
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home, deleted.
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current • The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
language is deleted. phonebook entries.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook • To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say 9Call.9 NOTE: the user can also
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9 operations at this point.
9Phonebook Erase All.9
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you number designation you wish to call.
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call

The following features can be accessed through the Currently in Progress
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call 3
your cellular service provider for the features that you on hold and answer the incoming call.
have.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Currently in Progress when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
Progress
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
call was rejected.
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer Conference Call
to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
to 9Conference Call.9 hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
joined into one conference call.
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. Three-Way Calling
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
8Phone’ button until you hear a single beep. tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
Toggling Between Calls
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
been joined into one conference call.
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time. Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the 8Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell • After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep. until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
Redial
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
3
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
9Redial.9 which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not • An active call is automatically transferred to the
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys- mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
tem.
UConnect™ System Features
Call Continuation
Language Selection
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
using,
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
the name of the language you wish to switch to number for your area.
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
language selection. follows:
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op- 9Emergency9 and the UConnect™ system will instruct
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
and usable across all languages.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
For command translations and alternate commands in Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
supported languages, refer to “Command Translations” Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
at the end of this section. be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
Emergency Assistance The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is of successfully making a phone call as compared to that
reachable: for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Paging

UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated
emergency situations when the cell phone has network Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system. certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance, Voice Mail Calling
3
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
9Towing Assistance.9
This method is designed to be used in instances where
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800- keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 phone system.
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
city in Mexico).
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover- service or automated customer service. Some services
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on require immediate response selection, in some instances,
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card. that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example, it).
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be 9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnect™ system will
used to navigate through an automated customer service play the current confirmation prompt status and you
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager. will be given the choice to change it.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts Phone and Network Status Indicators
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
recognition command immediately. For example, if a your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear notification to inform you of your phone and network
a{,9 you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and status when you are attempting to make a phone call
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
listen to the rest of the voice prompt. work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while able to hear the conversation coming from the other
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By order to mute the UConnect™ system:
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
3
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition. 9Mute.9
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
may feel that the call did not go through even though the 9Mute-off.9
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Information Service If you would like to connect or disconnect the

When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired
number 9#121,9 you can access voice activated automated cellular phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc. the instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
related information. manual.
Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
“Setup Phone pairing”.
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to • When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
Recognition’ button and say 9Transfer Call.9
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone phone being announced, press the 8Voice recognition’
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9 two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
with one electronic device at a time. lete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones

This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
that you want to use it with. 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
3
prompts.
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts. • You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
• You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
the phone you wish to delete.
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select. Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the Voice Training
UConnect™ system will return to using the highest For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
priority phone present in or near (approximately with nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
in 30 feet) the vehicle. system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From Voice Recognition (VR)
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode),
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
seconds until the session begins, or
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
• Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Setup, away from you.
Voice Training9 command.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the during a voice recognition period.
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
• Performance is maximized under:
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • low-to-medium blower setting,
switched off.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
• low road noise,
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• smooth road surface,
To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above • fully closed windows,
procedure and follow the prompts.
• dry weather condition.
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may • You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
be compromised with roof top down. spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some. number combinations may not be supported.
3
• When navigating through an automated system, such Far End Audio Performance
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
• Audio quality is maximized under:
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9send.9
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding • low road noise,
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• smooth road surface,
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
• fully closed windows, and
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook. • dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may Bluetooth Communication Link

be compromised with roof top down. Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
not the UConnect™ system.
mended to remain in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
Power-Up
the in-vehicle audio volume.
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
3
3
North American English Call

Primary Alternate(s) Cancel
Zero Confirmation Prompts
One Continue
Two Delete
Three Dial
Four Edit
Five Emergency
Six English
Seven Erase All
Eight Espanol
Nine Francais
Star (*) Help
Plus (+) Home
Pound (#) Language
Add Location List names
All List phones
Mobile Towing assistance

Mute Transfer call
Mute off Try again
New entry Voice training
No Work 3
Pager Yes
Pair a phone General Information
Phone pairing Pairing This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
Phonebook Phone book RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Previous following conditions:
Record again • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Redial
• This device must accept any interference received,
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
including interference that may cause undesired op-
Select phone Select
eration.
Send
Set up Phone settings / Phone
set up
SEATS Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the

seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
WARNING!
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position. • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Adjustment Bar

POWER SEAT ADJUSTER — IF EQUIPPED Six-Way Power Seat with Manual Recliner
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near
WARNING! the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down,
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat
belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a 3
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Power Seat Switch

This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to MANUAL LUMBAR — IF EQUIPPED
the rear of the power seat switch. To recline, lean forward The Lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of
slightly before lifting the lever, then lean back to the the driver’s seat. To increase support, rotate the handle
desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and down.
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position.
Lumbar Adjust Handle

Recliner Control Lever
FOLDING FRONT PASSENGER SEAT — IF DRIVER’S SEAT BACK TILT — IF EQUIPPED

EQUIPPED How to operate the driver’s seat:
The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to
1. Push the lever down until seat back releases.
provide additional cargo space.
2. Push the seat back forward.
To fold the seat forward pull up on the recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. 3. To return seat to a sitting position, push seat back
3
rearward.
Folding Seat Control Lever

NOTE: The driver’s front seat has a full recliner PASSENGER SEAT BACK TILT (EASY ENTRY
memory, which will allow the seat back to return to its SYSTEM) — CONVERTIBLE
original position. How to operate the passenger front seat:
1. Push the lever down until seat back releases.
2. Push seat back forward until it slides toward the
dashboard.
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt Lever
Passenger Seat Back Tilt Lever

3. To return seat to a sitting position, rotate seat back HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
upright until it locks.
WARNING!
4. Push seat rearward until the track locks.
NOTE: The passenger front seat has a full recliner Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
memory, which will allow the seat back to returned to its because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, 3
original position. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
NOTE: The passenger front seat has a track memory, when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
which returns the seat to just past the half way point of at low temperatures, especially if used for long
the track regardless of original position. periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push in the button
that is part of the head restraint rod guide, and push
down on the head restraint.
CAUTION!
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates

against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid heated seat
surfaces coming in contact and potential seat over-
heating, ALWAYS ensure that the seat heater is in the Heated Seat Switches
OFF position (amber lights are on for HIGH or LOW With the ignition switch in the on or run
and no amber lights for the OFF position) before position, you may choose from HIGH, LOW, or
placing any of the seats into a folded flat position. OFF heat settings. Amber LEDs on the side of
each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Two LEDs are illuminated for HIGH, one for LOW, and
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth when needed none for OFF. Pressing the switch once will select the
for the front driver’s and passenger’s seats. The heaters HIGH setting. Pressing the switch a second time, will
provide the same average heat level for both seat and select the LOW setting. Pressing the switch a third time,
back cushions. The controls for each heater are located will turn the heating elements OFF.
near the bottom center of the instrument panel.
When the HIGH setting is selected, the heater will FOLDING REAR SEAT (SEDAN)
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the be folded forward. Push and hold the buttons shown in
normal HIGH temperature level. If the HIGH setting is the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks.
selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW
after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, 3
the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LOW setting will turn off
automatically after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Folding Rear Seat Button

• If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center

WARNING!
lap/shoulder belt still does not operate properly check
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, and see if the Automatic Locking retractor (ALR)
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people system is activated.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed. WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat lock-out feature to ensure that the seatback is in the
belts fully upright and locked position when occupied. If
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
and using a seat belt properly. the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be
taken to your dealer for service. Failure to follow this
NOTE: warning could result in serious or fatal injury.
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt appears to be
locked into place, check to verify that the seatback is
fully latched.
FOLDING REAR SEAT (CONVERTIBLE)

To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. The seat back release knobs are
located in the trunk area. Pull the left side seatback
release knob to fold down the left side seatback. Pull the
right side seatback release knob to fold down the right 3
side seatback.
Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs

NOTE: Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright

WARNING!
position, be sure that the seat belt is brought forward to
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, avoid trapping it behind the seatback.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- CAUTION!
ously injured or killed.
Ensure that the seat back is latched with a hard push
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your to engage the latch, noting the presence of seat back
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat rubber-overslam bumpers that need to be overcome.
belts. Check that the seat back release knobs are pushed
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat fully forward in order to allow the latch to engage.
and using a seat belt properly.
TUMBLING REAR SEAT (SEDAN) • Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
To provide additional storage in the cargo area, each rear down the rear seatback.
seat can be tumbled forward.
CAUTION!
3
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
• Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of

the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
Tumbling Seat Strap

To return the rear seat to it’s upright latched position,
Tumbling Seat Release Strap rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat. Then
• Attach the elastic strap, located at the base of the seat lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to NOTE: The elastic strap should be reinstalled in the clip
hold the seat in place. on the base of the seat cushion before returning the seat
to its normal position.
TUMBLING REAR SEAT (CONVERTIBLE) To tumble the seat forward use the following procedure:
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
1. The seat back release knobs are located in the trunk
tumbled forward.
area. Pull the left side seatback release knob to fold down
the left side seatback. Pull the right side seatback release
CAUTION!
knob to fold down the right side seatback.
3
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs

2. From inside the vehicle, fold the rear seat back down
flat.
Tumbling Rear Seat

4. Attach the cinching tether strap, located at the side of
Folding Rear Seat Back the seat cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim
3. Pull the release strap located at the bottom of the panel and tighten by pulling the cinching strap until the
folded seat back and tumble the seat forward. seat is secure.
Cinching Tether Strap Releasing Cinching Tether Strap

To return the tumbling rear seat to the latched (normal) 2. Disconnect the cinching tether strap.
position use the following procedure:
NOTE: The strap should be reinstalled in the side
1. Loosen the strap by pushing rearward on the cinching pocket on the seat cushion before returning the seat to the
tether strap buckle. latched (normal) position.
NOTE: Prior to rotating the seat cushions rearward, be NOTE: Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright
sure that the rear seat belt buckles are secured with the position, be sure that the seat belt is brought forward to
straps, so that the buckles are accessible. avoid trapping it behind the seatback.
3. Rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat.
CAUTION!
Then lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
Ensure that the seat back is latched with a hard push
to engage the latch, noting the presence of seat back
rubber-overslam bumpers that need to be overcome.
Check that the seat back release knobs are pushed
fully forward in order to allow the latch to engage.
WARNING!
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be

injured if seats are not properly latched to their
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
Rear Seat Belt Buckle Straps
latched.
REAR SEAT REMOVAL (SEDAN) • Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of
The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
space.
• Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
3
Tumbling Seat Release Strap

• Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the NOTE: Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat
floor attachments. and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved
when removed from the vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat, insert the seat into the floor
attachments. Lower the release levers of the seat to latch
the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward
to latch the seat. Lift the seat back to its upright latched
position.
WARNING!
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be

injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
Release Lever Location latched.
• Using the handle on the seat, the seat assembly can
now be lifted and removed from the vehicle.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Then move the secondary hood latch (safety latch) lo-
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull cated under the front edge of the hood, slightly to the
the primary hood release lever located under the left side right of center, and raise the hood.
of the instrument panel.
Secondary Hood Latch

Primary Hood Release Lever
Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver’s side of the LIGHTS
engine compartment to secure the hood in the open
Map/Reading Lights (Sedan)
position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the
the inner hood surface.
rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing the
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to button. Press the button a second time to turn the light OFF.
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20 The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when

the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is

pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Map/Reading Lights (Convertible)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, these
3
lights, located under the rearview mirror can be turned
on by switches located at the base of the rearview mirror.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is

pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Multi-Function Control Lever Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel

The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation Lights
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is second detent for headlight operation.
located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlamp Control
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights, Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lever up or down. Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gear shift is in any position except park. 3
NOTE: On this vehicle, the daytime running light will
automatically turn off when the turn signal is in opera-
tion and automatically turn back on when the turn signal
is not operating.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
Fog Lights — If Equipped NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Fog Lamp Control
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function

Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull Turn Signal Control
out the end of the control lever.
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
3
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
Highbeam, Lowbeam, and Passing Lights

Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds
for the next flash to pass operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
Wiper/Washer Switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Rotate the
control to select the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Washers Mist Feature

To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected. 3
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Control
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Intermittent Wiper System

CAUTION!
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
allow the wipers to return to the park position before with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to into the upper end of the delay range.
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
restarted. it enters the LO continual speed position.
WARNING!
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the control to the second detent for Low speed Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
wiper operation, or to the third detent for High speed could lead to an accident. You might not see other
operation vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition

is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the
9Park9 position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
TILT STEERING COLUMN 3

To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the
multifunction control lever and move the steering wheel
up or down, as desired. Pull the lever back up to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Control

WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is

moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at approximately either 30 mph (40 km/h ) or
PT 7 Speed Control Ballon L or R
35 mph (56 km/h) depending on the model or engine
size. The speed control lever is located on the right side of To Activate:
the steering wheel. Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
To Deactivate:
WARNING!
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on lever towards you CANCEL, or normal brake or clutch
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
You could lose control and have an accident. Always the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch 3
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
To Set At A Desired Speed: ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL. Release the
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever. lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
While in the AutoStick mode, speed control will only speed will be set.
operate in third and fourth gear.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 2 mph (3

WARNING!
km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc. can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when the desired control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
speed is reached, and the new speed will be set. Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Tapping the SET DECELbutton once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases. To Accelerate For Passing:
Manual Transaxle: Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed Using Speed Control On Hills
control disengages is normal.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed is normal.
loss.
Vehicles equipped with four speed automatic transaxles

may experience a downshift to third gear while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to third
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
3
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off your vehicle’s
HomeLinkt Buttons
battery.
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
The HomeLinkt buttons that are located in the headliner rity Alarm is active.
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLinkt
channels.
WARNING! WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver ous injury or death.
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door Before You Begin
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at erase all channels before you begin training.
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage NOTE:

when programming. • Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
• After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the garage
away from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program.
door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the ga-
3
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program while garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
keeping the indicator light in view. proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button
until the HomeLinkt indicator changes from a slow to a and observe the indicator light.
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLinkt
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
Watch for the HomeLinkt indicator to change flash rates. when the HomeLinkt button is pressed.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and

then turns to a constant light, continue with program-
ming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”

button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next GATE OPERATOR/CANADIAN PROGRAMMING
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for two
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are 3
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please door or gate motor.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons, HomeLinkt” Step 3 with the following:
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button
erase the channels.
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINKT
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when BUTTON
fully trained. To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button until
HomeLinkt” earlier in this section. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
USING HOMELINKT
To operate, simply press and release the programmed 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the ming Homelinkt Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
SECURITY
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
in your vehicle.
used at any time.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when GENERAL INFORMATION

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
two conditions:
If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference
3
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
• Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
operation
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
to plug it back in?
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at device.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
POWER SUNROOF (SEDAN ONLY) — IF Turn the Ignition Key to the ACC or ON position, press
EQUIPPED and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof.
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp. The sunroof can be stopped at any position between
closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the switch
rearward will activate the Express Open Feature, causing
the sunroof to open automatically.
Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
Express Open Feature
Power Sunroof Switch During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward

WARNING!
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
condition until the switch is pushed forward again. from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are 3
the sunroof is open. properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
WARNING! Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object
to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in result.
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Wind Buffeting
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
death. pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

The outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key
Front Power Outlet
symbol or battery symbol, indicating power source. All
outlets are protected by a single 20–Amp fuse. It will accept a cigar lighter unit, which is part of the
optional Smokers Package. To preserve the heating ele-
The standard outlet in the front of the center floor console ment of the cigar lighter unit, do not hold the lighter in
is a conventional cigar lighter outlet. the heating position. As a child safety precaution, this
outlet is powered by the ignition switch, only when the
switch is in the ON or ACC positions.
There is one optional power outlet located in the right The Rear Power Outlet is powered directly by the battery.
rear cargo area. As an option, fuse #11 in the Integrated Power Module
(IPM), may be repositioned to allow power to come from
the ignition switch only when in the ON or ACC posi-
tions.
NOTE: The Rear Power Outlet will not accept a cigar
3
lighter unit as it is intended only for accessory items.
Rear Power Outlet

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CONSOLE FEATURES

The console has two front cup holders, a removable coin
CAUTION! holder, 12 volt power outlet and a front storage tray.
There are three additional cup holders; one is molded in
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw the center of the console to hold large cups and the others
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in the
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if rear seat. The floor console power outlet will also operate
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting. optional Smoker’s Package).
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
STORAGE
CAUTION!
Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin
• Many accessories that can be plugged into the 12
volt power outlet, draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use; i.e. cellular phones,
etc. Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the 3
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to de-
grade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power such as cool-
ers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc., will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started, (with Sliding Armrest
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
The center console provides a sliding armrest with two Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
unique storage compartments under the lid. the upper cover. Inside is an area to store a cell phone and
other miscellaneous items. Push the lower button on the
front of the armrest, and raise the armrest for access to
the lower storage bin. The lower storage area can be used
for storing up to six CD’s and other miscellaneous items.
Storage Pockets
There are also Storage pockets located on each door trim
panel.
REAR SHELF PANEL— IF EQUIPPED

The rear shelf panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo
area. The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five
different positions.
Sliding Armrest Storage Bins
NOTE: The liftgate may be opened or closed with the
rear cargo shelf panel in position 1, position 2, position 3
or position 4.
WARNING!
• To avoid tipping, lock the shelf securely in all

positions.
• Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open, or 3
use the shelf as a seat.
• Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious or fatal injury.
Position 1 (Top)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into Rear Shelf Panel Position 1
the top guides and slide forward. Press down on the back
of the shelf panel to lock it into place. WARNING!
Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 (top). In

an accident objects could strike occupants causing
serious or fatal injury.
Position 2 (Middle)
WARNING!
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the middle guides and slide forward. Press down on the Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 2
back of the shelf panel to lock it into place. (middle). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Position 3 (Floor)
the bottom guides and slide forward.
NOTE: To carry items that may soil the carpeting, the
rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position
3.
Position 4 (Vertical)
Rear Shelf Panel Position 2 the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the
floor and slide downward. Push the shelf panel forward
to lock it into place.
WARNING!
When in the vertical position, the rear shelf panel

should not be used as a barrier for large objects in the
cargo area when the seatbacks folded down. In an
accident objects could strike the seatbacks or occu- 3
pants causing serious or fatal injury.
Position 5 (table)
With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved
rearward to act as a serving counter.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 4
1. Install the front corners of the shelf panel into the top
rear guides. Press down on the shelf panel to lock it into
place.
2. Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and

lower the shelf leg.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 5
WARNING!
Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob
3. Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 5
labeled on the rear scuff plate. (table). Failure to follow this warning could cause the
shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED To adjust the crossbars with bottom-style releases (if
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the equipped), depress the button and slide the crossbar to
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The the next locking position. Alternate sides until the cross-
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be bars are positioned correctly for your cargo and the
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. stanchions are locked square to the slide rails.
Use both adjustable crossbars assemblies to support the External racks do not increase the total load carrying
3
load and distribute the load as evenly as possible. capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
To adjust the crossbars with latch-style releases (if
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity.
equipped), release the latches on the inboard side of the
crossbar supports on each side of the vehicle, then move NOTE: When the luggage rack is not in use, place the
the crossbars to the desired position. Once the crossbar is crossbars together at the rear of the vehicle. In this
in the desired position, return both latches to the locked position they are designed to improve the vehicle aero-
position. dynamics and reduce wind noise.
CAUTION! WARNING!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
as possible and secure the load appropriately. sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such “Cautions” when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 10
minutes of operation. Each following activation of the
Electric Rear Window Defroster
defroster will last for five minutes.
CAUTION!
3
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.
Rear Defroster Switch Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
The push-button is located at the center of the
instrument panel, below the radio. Press this but-
ton to turn on the rear window defroster, and the Rear Wiper/Washer Switch (Sedan Models Only)
optional electric remote control heated mirrors. An amber — If Equipped
light shows that the defroster is on. A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the ON position will
activate the wiper. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
before returning to the set position. position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to park.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. It is located
in the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol-
vent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
06 Rear Wiper Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 ▫ Odometer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4
m Instrument Cluster—Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 ▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
m Instrument Cluster—Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
m Instrument Cluster—Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
m Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
m Compass Mini Trip Computer (CMTC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button . . . 235 ▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 236 ▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 ▫ Operating Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 255

▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable ▫ Operating Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 257
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone —
m Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
m Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands-Free Phone,
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 And Video Entertainment Systems (VES™)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 259
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Operating Instructions - (CD Mode For CD
m Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 ▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Operating Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 ▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 271 ▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 4
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, And RAQ,
m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 275
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 - Air Vent 5 - Radio 9 - TRAC Off 13 - Hazard Lights

2 - Instrument Cluster 6 - Assist Handle 10 - Climate Controls 14 - Rear Window Defroster*
3 - Power Windows 7 - Glove Compartment 11 - Storage Cubby 15 - Power Convertible Top
4 - Analog Clock 8 - Heated Seats* 12 - Pass Airbag Off 16 - Side Mirror Control*
* If Equipped
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—BASE
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—PREMIUM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—TURBO
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
1. Fuel Gauge
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
fuel tank.
immediately and call for service.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
the front passenger’s (right) side of the vehicle.
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
3. Temperature Gauge the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem- removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
perature. Any reading below the red area of the control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
gauge shows that the engine cooling system is the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
higher than normal temperature when driving in hot from the engine cooling system.
weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go
4. Speedometer
traffic, or when towing a trailer.
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Tachometer As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
prevent engine damage. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
6. Transmission Range Indicator
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission 4
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
gear selection.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
7. Tire Pressure Monitor Light reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
NOTE: Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more (Refer to “Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires — Gen-
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace- eral Information” and to “Tire Pressure Monitor System
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to (TPMS)” in Section 5 of this manual for more informa-
continue to function properly. tion).
8. Odometer/Trip Odometer replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading

A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display, be determined.
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning
9. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
messages such as: door/deck/hatch/gate ajar and loose
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
gas cap. Loose gas cap will be displayed from the
System is ON.
Odometer/Trip Odometer on all models.
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the 4
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec-
Speed Control System is on.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instru-
ment cluster, all warnings including “door”, “dECK”, 10. Malfunction Indicator Light
“hATCh”, and “gATE” will only be displayed in the This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
EVIC display. For additional information, refer to “Elec- called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and
tronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped” in automatic transmission control systems. The light
Section 3. will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condi-
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
tion checked promptly.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, 12. Charging System Light
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light ing system. The light should come on briefly when
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
not require towing. while driving, it means that there is a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that 13. Turn Signal Indicators
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
soon as possible if this occurs.
NOTE: Turn signal bulbs are located in the Instrument
11. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob Panel.
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
If Equipped system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
If this indicator light flashes during accelera- indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your dropped below a specified level.
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. 4
ditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS — if
equipped. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
15. Brake System Warning Light
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
This light monitors various brake functions,
the brake fluid level checked.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there sary.
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system.
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.

WARNING!
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger- by an authorized dealer.
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also 16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
to the ABS system is required. out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to 17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi- This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the engine light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
will still be critically hot until the light goes out. ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
18. Low Fuel Light If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
symbol will light and a single chime will sound. is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
19. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not 4
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
on.
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
Brakes.
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
21. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This checked by an authorized dealer.
22. Oil Pressure Light come on during starting, stays on, or comes on while
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come driving, have the system checked by an authorized
on and remain on when the ignition switch is dealer.
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
24. High Beam Indicator
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
This light shows that the headlights are on high
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
an authorized dealer.
ing wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop beam.
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
25. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Button—If Equipped
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. Pushing this button will switch between the different
This can be determined using the procedure shown in EVIC functions.
Section 7.
Press the CMTC reset button to scroll through sub menus
23. Airbag Light (i.e. Trip Functions: AVG. Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8 Time, and Units.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If EQUIPPED
Equipped
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
On vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Informa-
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
tion Center (EVIC), when the appropriate conditions
exist, this display shows the EVIC messages. Refer to The Compass Mini Trip Computer features a driver-
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” later in this interactive display (displays information on outside tem-
section. perature, compass direction, and trip information). The 4
display is located on the lower left part of the cluster
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini Trip Computer
below the fuel and engine temperature gauge.
(CMTC) the display provides the outside temperature,
one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button
the vehicle is facing and the current radio station. Refer to
CMTC Reset Button — Secondary Reset Button
“Compass Mini Trip Computer” later in this section.
Press the left compass/temperature reset button to scroll
through sub menus (i.e. Trip Functions: AVG. Fuel
Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units (U.S. or Metric).
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following Compass/Temperature Display

messages will display in the window below the fuel and
Compass Variance
engine temperature gauge:
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
E . . . . . . . . Eight-point compass headings are displayed country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW) North is great enough to introduce some compass error.
14°F. . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius) In order to ensure compass accuracy, the compass vari-
AVG . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (U.S. or Metric) ance should be properly set according to the compass
DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to Empty variance zone map for the vehicle’s current location. The
ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed Time compass in your vehicle will now automatically compen-
NOTE: Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be sate for this difference.
changed from U.S. or Metric. by pressing and holding the
(left) secondary push button.
NOTE: Magnetic materials such as a laptop computer,

cell phone, and PDA’s (anything with a battery), should
be kept away from the top of the instrument panel. This
is where the compass sensor is located.
To Set the Variance
Start the engine, and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold (approxi- 4
mately ten seconds) the compass/temperature reset but-
ton until the current variance zone number is displayed.
To change the zone, press and release the reset button to
increment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary,
until the desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During program-
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Automatic Compass Calibration Manual Compass Calibration

The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminat- If the compass appears to be inaccurate, you may wish to
ing the need to manually calibrate the compass. When manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and compass, make sure the proper compass variance value
the CAL indicator message will flash in the EVIC until (zone) is selected (refer to the above “Compass Variance”
the calibration is complete. for additional information. Then continue to calibrate the
compass as follows:
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi-
ronment free from large metallic objects such as build- 1. Start the engine, and leave the transmission in the
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc. PARK position.
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph (8 2. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the
km/h) in one or more complete circles in a area free from Compass/Temperature reset button until the current
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the EVIC variance zone number is displayed.
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
3. Release the reset button, then press and hold again
NOTE: Keep all magnetic objects, such as laptop com- (approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is dis-
puters, cell phones and PDAs (anything with a battery) played with the “CAL” indicator on continuously in the
away from the compass sensor which is located in the top display.
of the instrument panel. These devices can interfere with
compass accuracy and performance.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle Trip Odometer (ODO)
in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph This display shows the distance traveled since the last
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines, large metallic reset. Press and release the right button (on the instru-
objects, until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass ment cluster) to switch from odometer, to trip A or trip B.
will now function normally. Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed to reset.
Odometer Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following Trip A 4
odometer messages will display: Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
CRUISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Activated Trip B
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault reset.
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right reset button (on the instrument cluster).
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
(EVIC) – If Equipped eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem-
perature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass heading
• Outside temperature display
EVIC Location
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays — If Equipped
• Audio mode display
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in (au-
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following tomatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion (manual
messages. transmissions).
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime) • Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) 4
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
• Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
chime)
motion)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
chime)
• Headlamps On
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Key In Ignition
EVIC Functions • Distance To Empty (DTE)

• Elapsed Time
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will
only occur if a resettable function is currently being
displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and
release the EVIC button a second time within three
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function
EVIC Button (Reset ALL will be displayed during this three second
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func- window).
tions are displayed on the EVIC:
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
Compass/Temperature/Audio Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
station.
tank level. This is not resettable.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle 4
to Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
in this section.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Average Fuel Economy
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
display of 9LOW FUEL9. This display will continue until
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the 9LOW FUEL9 text
continue from where it was before the reset.
and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the
current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel
tank level.
Elapsed Time Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset choices:
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
Language
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
When in this display you may select different languages
or START position.
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
Refer to Section 5, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depend-
(TPMS) for system operation. ing on availability. As you continue the displayed infor-
mation will be shown in the selected language.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) NOTE: UConnect™ language will not change using the
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF
vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions). EQUIPPED section of this manual for details.
Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 Km/h)
is displayed in the EVIC. When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
or OFF appears to make your selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock

When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped the remote keyless entry LOCK button is pressed. This
(manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (auto- on LOCK/UNLOCK feature. Press and hold the EVIC
matic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC button button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to
when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make make your selection.
your selection. 4
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1st is selected only the driver’s flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE UNLOCK selected. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will unlock at display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection.
the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
DRIVER’S DOOR 1st or ALL DOORS appears to make
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
your selection.
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
your selection. off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
“Off”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make
Headlights Only)
your selection.
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
appears to make your selection. “OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make
your selection.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section. When ON is selected all voice commands from the
U-Connect™ system are confirmed. Press and hold the
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF
When this feature is selected, the power window
appears to make your selection.
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
Display English or Metric large metallic objects, until the “CAL” indicator in the
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
changed between English and Metric.
NOTE: Keep all magnetic objects, such as laptop com-
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until puters, cell phones and PDA’s (anything with a battery)
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection. away from the compass sensor which is located in the top
of the instrument panel. These devices can interfere with
Automatic Compass Calibration
compass accuracy and performance. 4
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminat-
ing the need to manually calibrate the compass. When Manual Compass Calibration
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and If the compass appears to be inaccurate, you may wish to
the “CAL” indicator message will flash in the EVIC until manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
the calibration is complete. compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance Value
is selected (Refer to “Compass Variance” for additional
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi-
information). Then continue to calibrate the compass as
ronment free from large metallic objects such as build-
follows:
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph (8
PARK position.
km/h) in one or more complete circles in a area free from
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance
the EVIC displays the Personal Settings (Customer Pro- Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
grammable Features) menu. North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
3. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
North is great enough to introduce some compass error.
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. A long (longer
In order to ensure compass accuracy, the compass vari-
than two seconds) EVIC button Press will place the
ance should be properly set according to the variance
Compass in calibration mode.
zone map for the vehicle’s current location. The compass
4. The “CAL” indicator will come on continuously in the in your vehicle will now automatically compensate for
EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the this difference.
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
NOTE: Magnetic materials such as a laptop computer,
to calibrate. Press the EVIC button from the 9Calibrate
cell phone, and PDA’s (anything with a battery), should
Compass (Yes)9 screen will exit the EVIC Customer
be kept away from the top of the instrument panel. This
Programmable features, and return it to its normal oper-
is where the compass sensor is located.
ating mode).
5. Drive the vehicle slowly, under 5 mph (8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the

gear selector lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
you have displayed the Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button until “Compass
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the 4
EVIC.
4. Press and release the EVIC button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During program-
ming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
5. Press and release the EVIC button to exit.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION

To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
Radio Broadcast Signals
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
The radio will provide excellent reception under most
correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then
operating conditions. Like any system, however, automo-
quicker the longer the button is held.
tive radios have performance limitations, due to mobile
operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you
to believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals: AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary; and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
Setting The Analog Clock frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)

Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, and HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
thus remain a part of the AM reception. They interfere very NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal. side of your radio faceplate.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception can
be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines and
4
neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations,
interference that consists of amplitude variations can be
filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, which is the
major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and six-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
REF Radio
switch has been turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode Mode Button (Radio Mode)

Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
Electronic Volume Control up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
volume control to the right increases the volume and to stopping until you release it.
the left decreases it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
set at the same volume level as last played. speakers. MUTE will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
is ON.
feature.
NOTE: In Hands-Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the Clock Setting Procedure
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
trol.
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at 3. After the hours are adjusted, press the TUNE/AUDIO
each listenable station before continuing to the next. To control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to 4
stop the search, press SCAN a second time. blink.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode) 4. Adjust the minutes using the TUNE/AUDIO control.
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each RW/FF (Radio Mode)
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
search, press PSCAN a second time. tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
TIME Button
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display
for five seconds.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
Press the button to select AM or FM modes. display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust
the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control, and BASS will display. Press the tune control again or wait five seconds to exit
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or setting tone, balance, and fade.
decrease the Bass tones.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To Set The
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID Pushbutton Memory
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to When you are receiving a station that you wish to
increase or decrease the Mid-Range tones. commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
and press and release that button. If a button is not
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operating Instructions - CD Mode
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the 4
twice. radio display.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
button number will display. mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
begin at the start of track one.
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory, 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 NOTE:
Satellite (if equipped) stations. • On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio SCAN Button (CD Mode)
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
player. To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks. EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
seconds of the current selection.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
for five seconds.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition RW/FF (CD Mode)
will also return the sound from the speakers. Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the Operating Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing. MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
through the vehicle speakers.
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical 4
Random play. This feature plays the selections on the device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
change of pace. the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
selected track. the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
play.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode) RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the No function.
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Rotating the volume control or turning off the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers. Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
No function.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone — If
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Equipped
No function.
Refer to the “Hands-Free Phone (UConnectt)” section of
this Owner’s Manual.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If

No function. Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of this Owner’s
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Manual.
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO

WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO,
HANDS-FREE PHONE, AND VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS (VES™)
CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate. 4
RAQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) SEEK Button (Radio Mode)

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
the ON/VOL a second time to turn off the radio. listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
Electronic Volume Control
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
stopping until you release it.
the left decreases it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
set at the same volume level as last played.
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down, button a second time and the sound from the speakers
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
is ON. radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the NOTE: In Hands-Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Video Entertainment Sys- MUTE button mutes the microphone.
tem (VES)™ (if equipped).
SCAN Button (Radio Mode) 2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for trol.
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the TUNE/AUDIO
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
blink.
the search, press SCAN a second time.
4. Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE/AUDIO
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode) 4
control.
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
only).
Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
TIME Button tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
Press the TIME button and the time of day will be the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
displayed for five seconds. Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes. display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control, and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
decrease the Bass tones. balance and fade.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. five seconds. If no action is taken during the five second
time out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within five
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL- PTY information.
ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format Program Type 16 Digit-Character Display
types: Oldies Oldies
Program Type 16 Digit-Character Display Personality Personality
No program type or Public Public
None
undefined
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Religious Music Religious_Music
Alert Alert Alert Alert 4
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Classical Classical
Rock Rock
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
Soft Soft
College College
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Country Country
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Emergency Test Emergency Test
Sports Sports
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Talk Talk
Information Information
Top 40 Top_40
Jazz Jazz
Weather Weather
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
function only operates when in the FM mode. display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
12 FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
will tune to the preset station.
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the twice.
Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
button number will be displayed.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/DIR but-
ton. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
station and press and release that button. If a button is commit to pushbutton memory, 12AM, 12 FM, and 12
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ Satellite (if equipped) stations.
DIR button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
Operating Instructions - (CD Mode for CD Audio

CAUTION!
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC This CD player will accept 4 3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
position to operate the radio. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. 4
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
Inserting Compact Disc(s) ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into show the disc number, the track number, and index time
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
radio display. track one.
SEEK Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play) LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next Play)
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
Press the LOAD/EJECT button and the push-
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
button with the corresponding number where
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
MUTE Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play) PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE CD into the player.
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
reading the disc.
return the sound from the speakers.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
SCAN Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc TIME Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc. Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for five seconds
and all CDs will be ejected from the radio. RW/FF (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button 4
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
works in a similar manner.
the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a two minute Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
timeout. If the CD is removed and there are no other CDs tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and feature.
display 9INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are
TUNE Control (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
inserted within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
be displayed.
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
ignition OFF.
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD Mode Supported Media (Disc Types)
for CD Audio Play) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
change of pace.
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly When reading discs recorded using formats other than
selected track. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
play.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject. • Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Notes On Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders: 100
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
not play the file.
3-character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
3-character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 4
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rates.
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after MPEG Sampling Fre-
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of Bit rate (kbps)
Specification quency (kHz)
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in 320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times. MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
Supported MP3 File Formats Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported. single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Operating Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
by the following: the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
LOAD/EJECT - Load
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a two minute
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
timeout. If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the 4
display 9INSERT DISC” for two minutes. After two
CD into the player.
minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
is loading.
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
LOAD/EJECT - Eject The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push- Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
button with the corresponding number where able).
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
9elapsed time9 priority mode.
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
message display priority mode or elapsed time display move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
priority mode will display the song title for each file. to select a folder.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
the MP3 selection.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Equipped)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the adjustment of Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of this Owner’s
Tone, Balance, and Fade. Manual.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Switches back to Radio mode. Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of this Owner’s
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Manual.
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
System (VES™) (If Equipped)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES™)
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Guide.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast- Number (ESN/SID)
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel- ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
lite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- steps:
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios 4
System Activation With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa- twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
tion available when activating your system: the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
Number (ESN/SID).
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
2. Credit card information. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
has passed since any button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons appears in the display.
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
These radios will also display the current station name
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
and program type. For more information such as song
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual. Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, and RAQ, Radios
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9 TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
appears in the display. the button is released.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The equipped)
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
moving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 will radio.
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
PTY Button (SCAN(
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content 9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 4
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539- seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock- channel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available. button a second time to stop the search.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button while
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you performing a music type scan will change the channel by
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the channel and stop the search.
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
PTY Button (SEEK( Reception Quality

When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9 Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
button within five seconds. The channel will change to following reasons.
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Satellite Antenna structure or under a physical obstacle.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
form of short audio mutes.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items cause intermittent reception.
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
cause signal blockage.
the antenna.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 8. Do not play discs that are small in size or have
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the irregular shapes.
following precautions:
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
surface. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
wiping from center to edge. by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition 4
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
disc; avoid scratching the disc. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners, turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
or antistatic sprays.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Climate Controls
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located in the
too high.
center instrument panel, below the radio.
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains Mode Control (Air Direction)
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer The mode control allows you to
in the upper atmosphere. choose from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select either
The controls are as follows:
a primary mode, as identified by
Fan Control the symbols, or a blend of two of
Use this control to regulate the these modes. The closer the con-
amount of air forced through the trol is to a particular mode, the
system in any mode you select. more air distribution you receive
The fan speed increases as you from that mode
move the control to the right from
Panel
the OFF position.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the Defrost

upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer Air is directed through the windshield and side
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
comfort during sunny but cool conditions. mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
window demist outlets with a small amount both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if 4
through the defrost outlet. the A/C button has not been pressed and the indicator
lamp is off. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
Mix
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
only when necessary.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Temperature Control
CAUTION!
Use this control to regulate the
If the Defroster is not working the windshield and temperature of the air inside the
windows may become fogged and your visibility will passenger compartment. The blue
be greatly diminished. See your authorized dealer as area of the scale indicates cooler
soon as possible. the windshield and windows may temperatures while the red area
become fogged and your visibility will be greatly indicates warmer temperatures.
diminished.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems

Air Outlets lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
air flow. from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen- Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Air Conditioning MAX A/C

Rotate this control to engage the To quickly cool the vehicle interior
Air Conditioning. A lamp will il- follow the steps listed below:
luminate when the Air Condition-
ing System is engaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage 1. Set the Temperature Control to Max Cool.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
2. Set the Mode Control to Panel or Be-Level.
3. Press the Recirculation Button and the A/C Button.
4. Adjust the Fan Control to desired air flow setting.
NOTE: NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may

• Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix or make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
defrost modes. occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• See “Circulation Control” in this section, for proper or In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
extended use of this position. position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For defogging,
Circulation Control
select the Outside Air position.
Rotate this control to choose be-
tween outside air intake or recir- NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix
culation of the air inside the ve- or defrost modes.
hicle. A lamp will illuminate when
you are in recirculate mode. Only
use the recirculate mode to tem-
porarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust and to cool
the interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid weather.
Operating Tips
Control Settings Chart

Window Fogging Summer Operation

Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild Vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to
A/C, PANEL and blower controls. Direct the panel raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection
outlets toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate against overheating. A 50% concentration is recom-
without A/C for long periods as fogging may occur. mended.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Outside Air Intake
moved by using the defrost position. When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush,
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
snow or other obstructions such as leaves. Leaves col-
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-
lected in the air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and
ing on the inside surface of the glass
plug the plenum water drains.
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
vehicle operation.
defogging, use the Outside Air position.
Side Window Demisters

A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 m Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 ▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 295
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 ▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
5
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below 220°F Or
229°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 ▫ Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 ▫ Gear Ranges For The Four-Speed Automatic
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Turbocharger 9Cool-Down9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
m AutoStick — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 316
m Manual Transaxle Operation — If Equipped . . . . 301 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ 2.4 Liter Turbo — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 m Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Manual Transaxle — Recommended Shift ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 325
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
m Traction Control System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 311
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) — ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 5
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
m Fuel Requirements — Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . 337
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ 2.4L And 2.4L Standard Turbo Engines . . . . . . 337
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 356
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inad-
WARNING! vertently moving the gear selector lever or by press-
ing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
injuries.
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the 5
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle. AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
The gear selector lever must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes and depress the gear selector lever knob button
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
WARNING!
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the gear Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
selector lever in NEUTRAL. started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
is pressed to the floor. enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
NORMAL STARTING If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal. This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See Section 6
and release when the engine starts. If the engine has not of this manual for jump starting instructions.
started within three seconds, slightly depress the accel-
erator pedal while continuing to crank. If the engine fails
to start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the EXTREMELY COLD WEATHER (BELOW 220°F or
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the 229°C)
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure above. To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
IF THE ENGINE FAILS TO START

CAUTION!
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded. To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 15 seconds before trying again.
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the AFTER STARTING
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure. The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up. 5
WARNING!
TURBOCHARGER (COOL-DOWN(
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the NOTE: Letting the engine idle after severe operation
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing temperature. Do not increase the idle speed manually.
serious personal injury.
The following chart should be used as a guide in deter-

CAUTION!
mining the amount of engine idle time required to
sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
down, depending upon the type of driving and the precautions are not observed:
amount of cargo.
TURBOCHARGER (COOL-DOWN( CHART • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
Driving Conditions IdleBefore Shut Down complete stop.
Normal 0 min
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
Aggressive/Heavy Load 3 min come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
Trailer Tow 5 min speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
You must step on the brake pedal and depress the gear any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
selector lever knob button before you will be able to shift
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
out of PARK.
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must step on the brake pedal and depress
the gear selector lever knob button before you will be
able to shift the gear selector lever out of PARK.
step on the brake pedal and depress the gear selector

WARNING!
lever knob button before shifting out of PARK.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will function
PARK, or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher normally, except you may be able to shift the vehicle from
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the PARK, without depressing the brake pedal. If this occurs
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly obtain service from an authorized dealer as soon as
forward or in REVERSE. You could lose control of the possible.
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift the
gear selector lever into gear when the engine is idling AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IGNITION INTERLOCK
normally and when your right foot is firmly on the SYSTEM 5
brake pedal. This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the gear selector lever is in PARK and the gear selector
lever knob push button is out. It also prevents shifting
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION INTERLOCK SYSTEM out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON
This system prevents you from shifting the gear selector positions, and the brake pedal is depressed.
lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
pedal is pressed. This system is active only while the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
service.
Stop the vehicle and shift the gear selector lever into
FOUR-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE PARK.
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
Turn the Key to OFF then restart the engine.
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrat-
ing; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be Shift the gear selector lever into DRIVE and resume
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and preci- driving.
sion shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
RESET MODE is required.
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL
recur.
will continue to operate. This second gear limp-in feature
allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service
without damaging the transaxle.
GEAR RANGES FOR THE FOUR-SPEED

WARNING!
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range. those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
PARK you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. is removed from the ignition, the transmission gear
selector lever is locked in the PARK position, secur-
5
Always apply the parking brake first, and then shift the
gear selector lever into the PARK position. ing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-
more, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that

CAUTION!
you have engaged the transmission gear selector lever
into the PARK position: Before shifting the gear selector lever out of PARK,
• When shifting the gear selector lever into PARK, you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the
depress the button on the gear selector lever knob and steering wheel and gear selector lever are released.
firmly move the lever all the way forward until it Otherwise, damage to the steering column or gear
stops. selector lever could result.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the PARK position. REVERSE
• When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
the gear selector lever rearward without depressing complete stop.
the gear selector lever knob button NEUTRAL
The engine may be started in this range.
DRIVE / OVERDRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and best fuel economy.
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the [1] Low
DRIVE/OVERDRIVE range, such as when operating the This range should be used for maximum engine braking
vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing trail- will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
ers), use the [3] range. shifts from [2] to [1] will occur as early as possible.
[3] DRIVE AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
This range eliminates shifts into OVERDRIVE. The trans- AUTOSTICK is a driver-interactive transmission that
axle will operate normally in first and second while in offers manual gear shifting capability to provide you
this range. with more control. AUTOSTICK allows you to maximize 5
NOTE: Using the [3] range while operating the vehicle engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor- downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
mance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reduc- This system can also provide you with more control
ing excessive shifting and heat build up. during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa-
Use the [3] range when descending steep grades to tions.
prevent brake system distress.
AUTOSTICK Operation Move the lever back to the OVERDRIVE position to shift
The AUTOSTICK position is just below the OVERDRIVE out of the AUTOSTICK mode.
position and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”.
AUTOSTICK General Information
When you place the gear selector lever in the
AUTOSTICK position, it can be moved from side to side. • The transmission will automatically upshift from first
Moving the lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to to second gear and from second to third gear when
the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will be shown engine speed reaches about 6,300 RPM.
in the transmission gear display, located in the instru-
• Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
ment cluster.
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above 41
You can shift in or out of the AUTOSTICK mode at any mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If
• You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
you choose the OVERDRIVE mode, the transmission will
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
operate automatically; shifting between the four avail-
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
able gears. When you wish to engage AUTOSTICK,
simply move the gear selector lever to the AUTOSTICK • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear gear when coming to a stop.
until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
• Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• While in the AUTOSTICK mode, Speed Control will MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION — IF
only function in third or fourth gear. EQUIPPED
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
WARNING!
control.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the You or others could be injured if you leave the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode vehicle unattended without having the parking
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off. brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
• If the system detects a problem it will disable the especially on an incline. 5
AUTOSTICK mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera- sure the gear selector lever is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD),
tor pedal. when starting from a standing position. Damage to the
clutch can result from starting in THIRD.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, FIFTH gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift the gear selector lever into REVERSE until the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Five-Speed Shift Pattern NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
2.4 LITER TURBO — IF EQUIPPED The neutral position of the gear selector lever is located
between THIRD and FOURTH gear. This is the position
the gear selector lever will return to automatically when
neutral is selected. When shifting into FIFTH gear, be
sure to press the gear selector lever all the way to the
right to avoid accidentally selecting THIRD gear. Also,
use care when selecting FIRST gear to avoid accidentally
shifting the gear selector lever into REVERSE.
When moving the gear selector lever into REVERSE press 5
the lever to the left until the resistance is overcome. When
the ignition switch is in the ON position, a chime will
sound to confirm that reverse has been selected and the
backup lights will illuminate.
Five-Speed Shift Pattern With Turbo
NOTE: Listen for the audible chime to confirm RE-
VERSE gear is properly selected. Never shift the gear
selector lever into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE — RECOMMENDED SHIFT Table 2 - Manual Transaxle Maximum Performance

SPEEDS Shift Speeds In mph (km/h)
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in Table 1. Engine 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5
2.4L 30 (48) 60 (97) 85 (136) 115 (185)
Table 1 - Manual Transaxle Normal Acceleration
And Cruise Shift Speeds In mph (km/h) If you exceed these speeds, you may notice the engine cut
in and out. This is caused by an electronic limiter in the
Engine Mode 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5
engine computer. The engine will run normally when
Accel- you reduce engine speed.
2.4L 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (65) 45 (72)
eration
Turbo
Cruise 15 (24) 25 (40) 42 (68) 45 (72) Downshifting
2.4L Accel- Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (65) 45 (72) prolong engine life.
Non- eration
Turbo Cruise 15 (24) 25 (40) 42 (68) 45 (72)
CAUTION!
For improved performance, your manual transaxle may
be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in Table 2 If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
(within legal speed limits). at too high an engine speed, you could damage the
engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
down to SECOND or FIRST gear when descending a moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
steep grade. will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur- Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
dened. brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Always shift the gear selector lever into the
PARKING BRAKE PARK position (automatic transaxle) or into the RE-
When the parking brake is applied with the VERSE position (manual transaxle). To release the park-
ignition on, the BRAKE Light in the instrument
5
ing brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up slightly on the
cluster will come on. lever, then depress the button on the end of the lever and
push the lever fully down toward the floor.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless selector lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position. the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on a uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-
ing the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
brake before placing the gear selector lever in PARK, before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle locking failure and an accident.
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
BRAKE SYSTEM If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as bility, the remaining system will still function with some
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications by increased pedal travel during application and greater
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How- pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
greater than that required with the power system oper- fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
ating. indicator will light.
WARNING! WARNING! 5
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting ous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
braking capacity in an emergency. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) — IF

WARNING!
EQUIPPED
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
performance under most braking conditions. The system ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
WARNING!
• An ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
Pumping of the ABS will diminish their effective- resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
ness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only
the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or accidents.
stop. • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The ABS telltale light monitors the Anti-Lock When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
Brake System. The light will come on when the may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
ignition switch is turned to the ON position related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
and may stay on for as long as four seconds. forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However, ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
the conventional brake system will continue to operate stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose 5
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced debris, or panic stops.
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock You also may experience the following when the brake
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the system goes into Anti-Lock:
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible. • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic • A clicking sound of solenoid valves.
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing properly. Immediate repair to the ABS system at an • Brake pedal pulsations.
authorized dealer is required.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end POWER STEERING
of the stop. The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
WARNING!
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
interference caused by improperly installed or high effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer- parking maneuvers.
ence can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
performed by qualified dealership professionals. wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
accurate signals for the computer. noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
The Traction Control System (TCS) will improve accel-
Continued operation with reduced power steering eration and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. spin. The system reduces wheel slip and maintains
Service should be obtained as soon as possible. traction at the driving (front) wheels by engaging the
brake on the wheel that is losing traction. When this
occurs the TCS indicator lamp located above the instru-
ment cluster odometer will flash. The system operates at
CAUTION! speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
TCS OFF Switch

A push-button at the center of the instrument panel,
below the radio, turns the Traction Control System ON or
OFF.
The system is always in the “ON” mode unless: This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
• The TCS OFF switch has been used to turn the system
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system
off;
will automatically reactivate and turn off the TCS indi-
• There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction; cator lamp.
• There is a Traction Control System malfunction; If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System Off before attempting to
• The system has been automatically deactivated to
“rock” the vehicle free.
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TCS
indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION • European Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
Tire Markings
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced- 5
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
NOTE:
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: P215/65R15 95H. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%).
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— 9R9 means radial construction
—9D9 means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load correspond-
ing to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, 5
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-Pillar.
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire Placard Location 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
of this manual. on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
kg) {(since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs (295 calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
kg)}. ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4. NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
kg). 5
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overload them. tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION damage that result in tire failure. 5
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
Tire Pressure You could lose control of your vehicle.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy— maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal Information” section of this manual.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar. Tire Placard Location
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION!
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This the Winter.
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire 5
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
and cold tire inflation pressures. them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
on the vehicle at any given time.
stalled at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
5
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited tread
result.
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your Tire Spinning
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
vehicle at the first opportunity. stopping when you are stuck.
For additional information, refer to “Freeing A Stuck
WARNING!
Vehicle” in Section 6.
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects WARNING!
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
result in loss of vehicle control.
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
replaced. tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to: 5
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
Replacement Tires
WARNING!
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
You could lose control and have an accident resulting lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
in serious injury or death. when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little The service description and load identification will be
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
with oil, grease, and gasoline. equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of may result in false speedometer and odometer
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, result- readings.
ing in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components. Alignment and Balance
You could lose control and have an accident resulting Poor suspension alignment may result in:
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel 5
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Fast tire wear.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, • Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could wear.
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose • Vehicle pull to right or left.
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad- Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
failure and loss of vehicle control. authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration. SNOW TIRES

Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of- Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear. and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom- If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
mended. type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
CAUTION! safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
used.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
different loads and perform different steering, driving, Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at sible, if desired. The reason(s) for any rapid or unusual
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat- wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
terns. rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram below.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of the
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all-season 5
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
EQUIPPED is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle • TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
recommended cold placard pressure. tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres- • TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1.6 pressure warning has been illuminated, you must
km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation placard pressure in order for the TPM Light to turn off.
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the The system will automatically update and the TPM
“Tires – General Information” in this section for Light will turn off once the system receives the up-
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s dated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h)

CAUTION!
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
− For example, your vehicle may have a recom- • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
mended cold (parked for more than three hours) equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient warning have been established for the tire size
temperature is 68° F (20° C) and the measured tire equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to operation or sensor damage may result when us-
20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
5
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPM equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM may result.
Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
value. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

• TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or the tire.
condition.
BASE SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the Receiver Module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stopping ability. tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct The TPMS consists of the following components:
tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge,
• Receiver Module
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPM Light. • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings fault still exists. The TPM Light will turn off when the
The TPM Light will illuminate in the instrument fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure due to any of the following:
is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
the TPM sensors.
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically materials which may block radio wave signals.
update and the TPM Light will turn off. The vehicle may 5
3. Excessive accumulation of snow or ice around the
need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25
wheels or wheel housings.
km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Check TPMS Warning
The TPM Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The
NOTE:
system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will to receive this information.
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON due to the
GENERAL INFORMATION
low tire.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and following conditions:
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
• This device must accept any interference received,
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
including interference that may cause undesired op-
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
eration.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
following licenses:
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
2.4L AND 2.4L STANDARD TURBO ENGINES
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
2.4L standard engines are designed to meet
fuel system components.
all emission regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
using high quality unleaded “regular” Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
gasolines having an octane rating of 87. genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
The use of premium gasoline is not recom- ates are required in some areas of the country during the
mended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. 5
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
unleaded “regular” gasolines, and in some circumstances your vehicle.
may result in poorer performance.
CAUTION!
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- and driveability problems and may damage critical
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- fuel system components.
prove air quality.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or It is even more important to look for gasolines without
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from higher than those allowed in the United States.
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha-
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
nol.
lated gasolines.
MMT IN GASOLINE
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom- FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump, CAUTION!
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT. Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system. WARNING!
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or monoxide poisoning:
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance. • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon 5
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
products contain high concentrations of methanol. garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not stopped in an open area with the engine running for
the responsibility of the manufacturer. more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
against you. nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
windows fully open. reinforcement.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
container, it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
force open the restricting door.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passen-
ger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, Gas Cap Tether Hook
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
system could result from using an improper fuel the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). tank filled.
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
the fuel system. in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc- tions and doing so will cause the malfunction
tion Indicator Light to turn on. indicator light to turn on. 5
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE: next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in- (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light
strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not off.Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight- Section 7 of this manual for more information.
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel Rear Seat Occupants (sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a Rear Seat Occupants (convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Odometer/ Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs (52 kg)
Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instru- Rated Vehicle Capacity (sedan) . . . . . . . 865 lb (392 kg)
ment Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual. Rated Vehicle Capacity (convertible) . . . 715 lb (324 kg)
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer/trip odometer reset button to turn the message
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
TRAILER TOWING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

In this section you will find safety tips and information The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re- (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and 9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom-
safely as possible. mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
must be supported by the scale.
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) 5
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
you in understanding the following information:
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) driver).
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Frontal Area

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Trailer Sway Control
rear GAWR.
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
WARNING!
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition swaying motions while traveling.
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose Weight-Carrying Hitch
control of the vehicle and have an accident. A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
Tongue Weight (TW) hitches are the most popular on the market today and
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or trailers.
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When formance, and could result in an accident.
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and Vehicle dealer for additional information. 5
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
trailers weighing over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with the optional
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
service center for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Max. GTW
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Class
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS
Max. GTW Max. Tongue Wt.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note 1)
2.4L N/A and 2.4L Turbo/
20 Sq Ft 1000 lbs (454 kg) 110 lbs (50 kg)
Automatic*
2.4L N/A and 2.4L Turbo/
20 Sq Ft 1000 lbs (454 kg) 110 lbs (50 kg)
Manual* 5
* N/A (Naturally Aspirated)
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo,
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the follow-
ing “Tire–Safety Information” section in this manual.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the TOWING REQUIREMENTS

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
mended:
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle. CAUTION!
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. • Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi (805 km)
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional vehicle. 5
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, • During the first 500 mi (805 km) of trailer towing,
must be considered as part of the total load on your limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
cargo for your vehicle. manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
• Safety chains must always be used between your

WARNING!
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
• Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer slack for turning corners.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
have an accident. PARK. Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over- • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, ratings are not exceeded:
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
1. GVWR
sis structure or tires.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized • When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
(This requirement may limit the ability to always mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
percentage of total trailer weight). with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire. • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe 5
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
personal injury.
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures. • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
pressures before trailer usage.
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage brake controller is not required.
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000

WARNING!
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg). Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
CAUTION! tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this tance. When towing you should allow for additional
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- or seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness. 5
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. 4-Pin Connector
Refer to the following illustrations.
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The OVERDRIVE/DRIVE range can be selected when
towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this
range, the [3] range should be selected.
NOTE: Using the [3] range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
7-Pin Connector sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See the “Mainte-
nance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for transmis-
sion fluid change intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level Towing Tips — Cooling System
before towing. To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped) • City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
• Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
• Highway Driving
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed. 5
• Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
• Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance Section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
MOTORHOME, ETC.) wheels are off the ground.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
towing with all four wheels on the ground) may be towed with all four wheels on the ground, in a
forward direction, at any legal highway speed, for any
CAUTION! distance, if the transaxle is in NEUTRAL.
Recreational towing on vehicle’s equipped with au-

tomatic transaxle’s is not recommended.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
m Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 6
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 ▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
m Jump-Starting Procedures Due To A Low m Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

Hazard Warning Switch In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
The flasher switch is located on the instrument tion.
panel, below the radio. Depress the switch and
both cluster indicators and all front and rear • On the highways — Slow down.
directional signals will flash. Depress the • In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off. neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)

CAUTION!
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call for service. Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act and call for service.
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat 6
from the engine cooling system.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or WARNING!

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of this
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
JACK LOCATION SPARE TIRE STOWAGE

The jack and jack-handle are stowed behind the right rear The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
side trim panel in the cargo area. vehicle by means of a hook/basket mechanism. To re-
move or stow the compact spare, use the jack handle to
rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
Jack Storage
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
Spare Tire Storage

Spare Tire Removal

WARNING!
Lift up the cover and fit the jack-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
swivel hook from the stowage basket. Swing the basket vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
down to remove the compact spare tire. the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
CAUTION!
The hook is designed for use with the jack handle • Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch. • Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING example, if changing the right
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or front tire, block the left rear
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear wheel.
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
vehicle is being jacked.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
Jack Warning Label the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
6
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in park; a manual transmission in
reverse.
WARNING! WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle: vehicle:
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
jack. careful of motor traffic.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
jack. securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. valve stem facing the ground.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and • Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
stowage bag.
NOTE: If equipped with a center cap that covers the the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly
wheel nuts, pry off the cap using the small end of the lug engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be
wrench. To reinstall the cap, make sure it is properly changed.
lined up before pushing it on to the wheel.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the 6

cross-member below the radiator, on the front sus-
pension cross-member, or on the rear axle assembly.
3. There are two front jacking locations on each side of Jacking Locations
the body and rear jacking locations located on the trailing Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
arm bracket under the triangular cut out symbol. Turn securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,

WARNING!
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
provides maximum stability. edges.
WARNING!
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
to remove the tire.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
free. Stow the lug wrench, and jack in their designated BATTERY
location. Secure all parts using the means provided.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
6
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
10. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park

WARNING!
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- matic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEU-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could TRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has 3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. loads.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. 4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp- terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
erly, so follow this procedure carefully. the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis-
charged battery.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry

such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-

WARNING!
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t position.
lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the 7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
with large quantities of water.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam- quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from
the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 6
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
ACCELERATION
volts.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good (driving) wheels.
contact.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

WARNING!
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. become visible.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle 4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and 5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
TRACTION NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control,

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
be observed: and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
slushy. wheels is most effective.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

WARNING!
With Ignition Key
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam- Four Speed Automatic Transaxle
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some- Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 tions: The steering column must be unlocked and the
mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t let gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the
speed. towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h). If the
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to 6
CAUTION! the transaxle.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast Manual Transaxle
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can Your vehicle may be towed in a forward direction, with
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above all 4 wheels on the ground, and the gearshift lever is in
30 mph (48 km/h). NEUTRAL. If the transaxle is not operative, the vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.
All Transaxles Without The Ignition Key

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
CAUTION! with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not in age to the vehicle.
the LOCK positions.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
not attach to front or rear suspension components. may be towed in a forward direction, at any legal
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper highway speed, for any distance, if the transaxle is in
towing. NEUTRAL.
If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with auto-
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
axle remains in NEUTRAL.
CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE

If your vehicle is experiencing electrical failure (low
battery, etc.) and it is necessary to raise the convertible
top, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw, which
is found in the trunk under the convertible top storage
area.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops.
This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the
convertible top to be raised manually.
6
Bleeder Screw
3. Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins 6. Raise the handle into the stowed position.
7. Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by
4. Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches. turning the screw clockwise until it stops. Tighten the
screw securely.
5. Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to
engage the latches. NOTE: Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can
cause convertible top operating concerns.
Engaging Convertible Top

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 2.4L Turbo Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
m 2.4L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 388
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 380 ▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 ▫ Ignition Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 7
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Engine Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 390
m Authorized Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Air Cleaner Element (Air Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . 391
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 ▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 ▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Power Steering – Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
m Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Cloth Top Additional Cleaning Procedure . . . . 418
▫ Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Cloth Top Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Weather Strip Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
m Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 403
m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
m Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . 428

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 m Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights . . 426 m Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 426 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Tail/Stop, And Rear Turn Signal Lights . . . . . . 427 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Back Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
7
2.4L TURBO ENGINE COMPARTMENT

2.4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can PROGRAMS
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
installed, or damaged. A gASCAP message will be dis- an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an indication that the
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob-
is ready for testing.
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the prob- Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
lem will turn the MIL light off. system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace- 7
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must should not proceed to the I/M station.
do the following:
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch. illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
system is ready , and you can proceed to the I/M
or start the engine.
station.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb you may need to do nothing more than drive your
check. vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
happen:
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
engine running. against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS WARNING!

Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
warranty. service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- 7
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
services determined by the engineers who designed your check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
vehicle. overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
ENGINE OIL
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, will • Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
• Stop and Go driving.
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at • Extensive engine idling.
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
• Driving in dusty conditions.
engines.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
CAUTION!
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
above the “Max” mark on the engine oil dipstick will • Trailer towing.
cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This • Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
could damage your engine. • Off-Road or desert operation. 7
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
Change Engine Oil fuel.
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
following list to decide if any apply to you.
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All Engine Oil Selection
Engines” of the 9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this For best performance and maximum protection under all
manual. types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then
MS-6395.
change your engine oil at every interval shown on
schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance sched- American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
ule section of this manual. Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
been certified by the American
equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
Petroleum Institute (API). The
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
manufacturer only recommends
“A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
API Certified engine oils.
manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L and 2.4L Materials Added To Engine Oils
Turbo Engines The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
starting and vehicle fuel economy. it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Disposing of Used Engine Oil
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
partment” illustration in this section. your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
ber should not be used.
your area. 7
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
oil change.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter Selection Special tools are required to properly measure tension
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace- check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider- between the belts and other engine components.
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
SPARK PLUGS
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
quality oil filters and are recommended.
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
DRIVE BELTS — CHECK CONDITION AND stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
TENSION replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules, plug. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension. this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure. your vehicle.
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or IGNITION WIRING SYSTEM
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re- connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
quired, see your authorized dealer for service. damaged, or faulty cables should be replaced.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
catalyst as an emission control device. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
damage. malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

7
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition

WARNING!
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over motion.
materials that can burn. Such materials might be • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust vehicle.
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
can burn. disconnected for prolonged period.
ENGINE TIMING BELT
Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals described
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning in the appropriate maintenance schedule.
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica- from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
tions, should be obtained immediately. mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or NOTE: For vehicles with a Turbo engine, a small
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary. amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is
normal. The amount will depend on driving style. The air
FUEL FILTER
cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make-up-
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
air filter element should be installed during the normal
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
air filter maintenance procedure.
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
WARNING!
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service. The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT (AIR FILTER) in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, engine compartment before starting the vehicle with 7
the filter element should be inspected periodically and the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule serious personal injury.
“B”.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
WARNING!
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
CAUTION! contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the bat-
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
tery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides battery
large amounts of water.
heat protection and will extend overall battery life.
Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
evaporative loss of the battery fluid. or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE

CAUTION!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
It is essential when replacing the cables on the should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
battery that the positive cable is attached to the at the start of each warm season. This service should
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. time.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast 7
charger” to provide starting voltage as battery dam-
age can result.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause using recovery and recycling equipment.
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
further warranty information. sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant POWER STEERING – FLUID CHECK
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
should be done by an experienced repairman. apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
STEERING LINKAGE
WARNING!
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and external leakage and damage when other maintenance is
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving performed.
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do BODY LUBRICATION
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
power steering fluid. seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
for correct fluid types. attention should also be given to hood latching compo- 7
FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINTS nents to insure proper function. When performing other
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when- and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
ever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
be replaced.
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
2. Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
the wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
place the wiper arm on the windshield.
mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film 3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
and help reduce streaking and smearing. until it locks in place.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade re-
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt placements fit multiple vehicles.
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade re-
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, placements fit multiple vehicles.
gasoline, etc.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
flush out the residual water. aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
WARNING! into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
Commercially available windshield washer solvents change or lubrication. Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around WARNING!
the washer solution.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
EXHAUST SYSTEM Breathing it can make you unconscious and can 7
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
system. manual.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
COOLING SYSTEM Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
WARNING! months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
controlled and can start at any time the ignition spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
switch is in the ON position. face of the condenser.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never leaks.
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill

CAUTION!
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedules” in Sec- Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
tion 8 of this manual. gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove gency, it should be replaced with the specified cool-
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old ant as soon as possible.
antifreeze solution. Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
Selection Of Coolant coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
coolant type. may plug the radiator. 7
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
coolant can be used up to five Years or 100,000 miles the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended cooling system.
maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
the vehicle is operated.
When adding coolant:
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopart engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
Antifreeze/Coolant five Year/100,000 Mile Formula changes.
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
exceed 70%) if temperatures below 234° F (237° C) radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
are anticipated.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
WARNING! local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by humans and animals
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is ground. If ethylene glycol engine coolant is ingested by
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to anyone, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to ground spills immediately.
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while Coolant Level
the system is hot or under pressure. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the 7
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- ture, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
gine damage may result. between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month. • Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
protected against freezing.
not overfill.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
Points To Remember
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor sure tested for leaks.
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
aluminum components.
enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
moving component that may cause heat damage or
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
mechanical wear.
condenser clean, also.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
collapsed
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
mileage, and increased emissions. present.
HOSES AND VACUUM/VAPOR HARNESSES Components should be replaced immediately if there is
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence any evidence of degradation that could cause failure. 7
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
FUEL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

WARNING!
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio- or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
rated gasoline. high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in braking capacity in an emergency.
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
BRAKE SYSTEM Brake, Power Steering and Oil Cooler System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Hoses
system components should be inspected periodically. When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Mainte- inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
nance Schedule” in this manual. evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces- NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done when-
sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particu- ever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil
lar attention should be made to examining those hose change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface crack-
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust ing, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence of
manifold. cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or WARNING!
collapsed.
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera- cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There- hoses replaced immediately. 7
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Refer
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- fluid type.
ure.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- transaxle , the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to
forming underhood services. both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
in one system will not affect the other system. The
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If
voir.
the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
cause leaking in the system. a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
leak and a checkup may be needed. type.
WARNING! WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
point than the recommended MOPARt DOT 3 prod- spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
uct or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS brake fluid catching fire.
specification may result in sudden brake failure
during hard prolonged braking. You could have an
accident. Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
brake fluid, all brake seal components could be 7
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear

The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are position ending with the lever in “P” (Park).
contained within a single housing.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle.
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), which
transaxle and the fluid.
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
FLUID LEVEL CHECK — FOUR-CYLINDER driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
ENGINES comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
Use the following procedure to check the automatic temperature below 80°F (27°C).
transaxle fluid level properly:
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. remove dipstick and note the reading.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
seconds. crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the Fluid And Filter Changes
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
overfill. changed as follows:
CAUTION! Maintenance schedule “A”—Non Turbo Charged En-

gines – No change necessary.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manu- Maintenance schedule “A”—Turbo Charged Engines –
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio- No change necessary.
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid Maintenance schedule “B”—All Engines – Every 60,000
other than that recommended by the manufacturer miles (100 000 km) change fluid and filter under the
will result in more frequent fluid and filter following conditions:
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu- • Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
ine Parts” for the correct fluid type. trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for 7
• Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for mainte-
the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid,
nance schedules.
make certain that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid Fluid Level Check
and filter should be changed. Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
Special Additives
point not more that 3/16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
the hole.
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
Frequency Of Fluid Change
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
adversely affect seals.
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
MANUAL TRANSAXLE following conditions exist:
Lubricant Selection • The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for immediately.
the correct fluid type.
• If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual.
APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION FROM What Causes Corrosion?

CORROSION Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- The most common causes are:
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly • Stone and gravel impact.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme • Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection. Washing 7
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using Mopart Car Wash or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care

lated on your vehicle, use Mopart Super Kleen Bug
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• Use Mopart Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains a month.
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing open.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
finish.
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
metal and painted surfaces. sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
packaged and sealed. protective finish.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider Interior Care
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Instrument Panel Cover
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
color of your vehicle. use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
restore the low glare surface.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a Cleaning Interior Trim
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp 7
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopart cloth, a damp cloth with Mopart Total Clean, then
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a Mopart Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopart Total
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Mopart or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
Cleaning Leather Upholstery

WARNING!
Mopart Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
and Mopart Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid Equipped
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- manner:
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not with a clean, dry towel.
required to maintain the original condition.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-Purpose Glass Surfaces

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
tialst products.
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
Cleaning Headlights window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Instrument Panel Cover
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which 7
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
lowed by rinsing.
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel low glare surface.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Dry with a soft tissue.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
rag. appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
2. Dry with a soft tissue. top and storage compartment.
Seat Belt Maintenance Washing
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or preferred.
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Avoid high pressure car washes, as they can damage Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
force water past the weather strips. vents, petroleum distillates or plasticizers. always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
before washing the top. The top should be washed with entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and Mopar Car Wash the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
or a mild soap solution. Do not use detergent. chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
7
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may
be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist,
contact your local dealership for further suggestions.
Cloth Top Additional Cleaning Procedure

CAUTION!
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner (part Avoid getting Scotchguard_ on the surrounding
number 05012245AA) to the complete stain, extending 2 weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
inches (50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle these items might occur.
brush, scrub in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy
scrubbing. Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is
still apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the Weather Strip Care
stain is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodi-
warm water. Let the top dry before lowering it. 7 cally with Mopar Weather Strip Lubricant (part number
Cloth Top Protection 4773427), to keep them soft and pliable.
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your
Twillfast™ (cloth) top periodically. Use Mopar Convert-
ible Cloth Top Treatment or a fabric protectant such as
Scotchguard_ is suggested. The top should be clean and
dry before application of the protectant.
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM) INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)

An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine Cartridge
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center Cavity Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of
Power Top
each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside 40 Amp Feed —
of the cover. 1
Green Convertible
Only
20 Amp Yel- AWD ECU
2
low Feed
CHMSL
3 10 Amp Red Brake
Switch Feed
Ignition 7
4 10 Amp Red
Switch Feed
20 Amp Yel-
5 Trailer Tow
low
Integrated Power Module Location


Cartridge Cartridge
Cavity Mini Fuse Description Cavity Mini Fuse Description
Fuse Fuse
IOD Sw/ 20 Amp Yel- Ign Run/
12
Pwr Mir/ low Acc Inverter
6 10 Amp Red Ocm Steer- Pwr run/
ing Cntrl 20 Amp Yel-
13 Acc Outlet
Sdar/Hfm low
RR
30 Amp IOD CCN/
7 IOD Sense1
Green 14 10 Amp Red Interior
30 Amp Lighting
8 IOD Sense2
Green RAD Fan
40 Amp 15 50 Amp Red Relay Bat-
9 Power Seats
Green tery Feed
CCN, IGN Run/
20 Amp Yel- 15 Amp Lt.
10 Power 16 Acc Cigar
low Blue
Locks Ltr/Sunroof
15 Amp Lt Power Out-
11
Blue let

Cartridge Cartridge
Fuse Fuse
IOD Feed IGN RUN
17 10 Amp Red CVT Mod/ Hvac/
22 10 Amp Red
Mod_Wcm Compass
ASD Relay Sensor
40 Amp
18 Contact ENG ASD
Green 15 Amp Lt.
PWR Feed 23 Relay Feed
Blue
PWR Amp 3
20 Amp
19 1 & Amp 2 25 Amp PWR Sun-
Yelow 24
Feed Natural roof Feed
15 Amp Lt. IOD Feed Heated Mir- 7
20 25 10 Amp Red
Blue Radio ror
IOD Feed ENG ASD
15 Amp Lt.
21 10 Amp Red Intrus 26 Relay Feed
Blue
Mod/Siren 2

Cartridge Cartridge
Fuse Fuse
IGN RUN ABS MOD/
27 10 Amp Red Only ORC 33 10 Amp Red J1962
Feed Conn/PCM
IGN RUN 30 Amp ABS Valve
34
28 10 Amp Red ORC/OCM Pink Feed
Feed 40 Amp ABS Pump
35
29 EMPTY Green Feed
20 Amp Yel- Heated Headlamp
30 30 Amp
low Seats 36 Washer
Pink
Headlamp Control
31 10 Amp Red Washer Re- 25 Amp
37 Spare
lay Control Natural
ENG ASD
30 Amp
32 Control
Pink
Feed 1
VEHICLE STORAGE
CAUTION!
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
• When installing the Integrated Power Module days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop- battery. You may:
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so • Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure. • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to

use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it 7
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHTS BULBS — Outside Bulb No.

Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006XS
LIGHT BULBS — Inside Bulb No. High Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005XS
Center Console Floor Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37 Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6233137 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4157NAKX
Console Gear Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194 Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Dome Light (sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T579 Center High Mounted Stop Light
Dome Light / Sport Bar Lights (convertible) . . . . T904 (CHMSL) (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921–W16W
Instrument Cluster Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Center High Mounted Stop Light
Overhead Reading Light (Overhead Console) . . . T1037 (CHMSL) (Convertible). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Overhead Reading Light (Rearview Mirror) . . . . . T192 Rear Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T906 Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966 Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157-P27/7W
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your

fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life.
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,

located in the front wheel well opening.
3. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn and
2. Disconnect the electrical connector. replace the bulb. 7
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield, 1. Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash
located in the front wheel well opening. shield to gain access to the fog light.
2. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn to replace 2. Twist and remove the bulb from the fog light housing.
and replace the bulb.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
Tail/Stop, and Rear Turn Signal Lights 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
1. Remove the screw attaching the tail light housing and Back Up Lights
remove the housing from the vehicle.
2. Twist the bulb socket 1/4 turn to remove it from the
housing.
7
Removing Backup Light Bulbs
1. To remove the backup lamp, you must take a fiber Center High Mounted Stop Light
stick and slide it along the inboard side of the lamp and
1. Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL
compress a spring clip to allow it to partially 9pop9 out to
cover.
the secondary catch.
2. Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching
2. Fully compress the clip to get the lamp to come out
the two side latches.
completely.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
3. Remove the socket from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 15 Gallons 56.7 Liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.4 Liter Engines (Use API Certified
5.0 qts 4.7 Liters
SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil.)
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engines (Mopart
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 6.5 qts 6.2 Liters
Miles Formula), or equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

ENGINE
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
Engine Coolant mula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil. Refer to your
Engine Oil (2.4L Standard, 2.4L Standard Turbo) engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade meeting
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Non Turbo—Mopart 4105409AB or equiv.
Engine Oil Filter
Turbo—Mopart 4781452BB or equiv.
2.4L Non Turbo — Championt RE16MC, 040” Gap 2.4L
Spark Plugs
Turbo — Championt RE14MCC5,.050” Gap.
87 Octane for 2.4L Standard Turbo and 2.4L Standard
Fuel Selection
Non Turbo Engines.
CHASSIS
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MS9602.
Mopart DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
Brake Master Cylinder
acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or
equivalent.
Mopart Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopart ATF+4 Au-
Power Steering Reservoir
tomatic Transmission Fluid.
7
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
m Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . 434 ▫ Schedule “A”—Non Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
S
m Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 ▫ Schedule “A”—Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 C
H
▫ Schedule “B”—All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N
T The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type There are three maintenance schedules that show re-
E must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure quired service for your vehicle.
N the continued proper functioning of the emission control
A First is Schedule “B”—ALL ENGINES. It is for vehicles
N system. These, and all other maintenance services in-
that are operated under the conditions that are listed
C cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
E below and at the beginning of the schedule.
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating • Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving. • Stop and go driving.
E
D • Extensive engine idling.
Inspection and service should also be done any time a
U
L malfunction is suspected. • Driving in dusty conditions.
E
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis- • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor- • Trailer towing.†L
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 M
A
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- Second is Schedule “A”—NON TURBO. It is for vehicles I
N
vice).†L that are not operated under any of the conditions listed T
under Schedule 9B9—ALL ENGINES. E
• Off-road or desert operation. N
Third is Schedule “A”—TURBO. It is for vehicles that are A
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
not operated under any of the conditions listed under N
fuel. C
Schedule 9B9—ALL ENGINES. E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- S
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the C
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All H
interval that occurs first.
Engines” of the 9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this E
manual. D
CAUTION! U
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and L
E
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 Failure to perform the required maintenance items S
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow may result in damage to the vehicle.
schedule “B—All Engines” of the 9Maintenance Sched-
8
ules9 section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule 9B9—ALL ENGINES.
M 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I At Each Stop for Fuel • Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
N
T • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully operation.
E
N warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while • Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
A the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- proper fit.
N racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
C At Each Oil Change
E level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Change the engine oil filter.
S • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
C required. • Inspect the exhaust system.
H
E Once a Month • Inspect the brake hoses.
D
U • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-
L damage. nents.
E
S • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals • Check the automatic transaxle fluid level.
8 as required.
• Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake condition.
master cylinder and transaxle and add as needed.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 437 M
A
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km). I
N
Follow schedule “B”—All Engines if you usually operate
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high T
your vehicle under one or more of the following condi- E
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C). N
tions.
A
• Trailer towing.†L N
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
C
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually • Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- E
operated under one or more of the conditions marked vice).†L
with an L. S
• Off-road or desert operation. C
Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48,000 miles (80 H
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) E
000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one or D
fuel.
more of the conditions marked with an †. U
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your L
• Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C). E
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, S
• Stop and go driving. whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the 9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this
8
• Extensive engine idling.
manual.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
M 438 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
A
I NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance sched-
N
T replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 ule section of this manual.
E km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
N If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
schedule “B—All Engines” of the 9Maintenance Sched-
A equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
N ules9 section of this manual.
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
C
E If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is “A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then manual.
S change your engine oil at every interval shown on
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000 N
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000) (30 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X X N
replaced at 3 months. A
N
Rotate tires. X X X C
Inspect the brake linings. X E
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as X S
necessary.* C
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as nec- H
X E
essary. D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
N Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000
T (Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X X
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate tires. X X X
E Inspect the brake linings. X X
S
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X
C Replace the spark plugs. X
H Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
E
D Inspect the PCV valve and replace as neces- X
U sary.*
L
E Replace the Make-up air filter. X
S Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
A
I
Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000 N
(Kilometers) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000) T
E
N
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for X S
trailer towing. C
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as X H
E
necessary.* D
Change the manual transaxle fluid.† X U
L
Inspect the Make-up air filter. Replace as nec- X E
essary. S
8
A
I
N Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000
T (Kilometers) (95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X X
A replaced at 3 months.
N
S
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X
C Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
H Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
E
D Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces- X
U sary. Not required if previously changed. * ‡
L
E Replace the Make-up air filter. X
S Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8 Change the automatic transaxle fluid and fil- X
ter.L
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
X
months, if not done at 102,000 miles.
A
I
Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000 N
(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000) T
E
N
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and re- S
X
place as necessary.* C
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X H
E
Replace the spark plugs. X D
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces- E
X S
sary. Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as nec-
X
8
essary.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Replace the Make-up air filter. X
A
I
N Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000 105,000
T (Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re- X X X X X
A placed at 3 months.
N
C Rotate tires. X X
E Inspect the brake linings. X
S
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for trailer X
C towing.
H Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as X
E
D necessary.*
U Change the manual transaxle fluid.† X
L
E Replace the engine timing belt. * X
S Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not replaced X
8 at 60 months.
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as necessary. X
A
I
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000 N
(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re- X X X X X N
placed at 3 months. A
N
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. * X S
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X C
Replace the Make-up air filter. X H
E
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X D
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter.L X U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *‡ X E
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, S
X
if not replaced at 102,000 miles. 8
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
A
I
N Miles 123,000 126,000 129,000 132,000 135,000
T (Kilometers) (205 000) (210 000) (215 000) (220 000) (225 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re- X X X X X
A placed at 3 months.
N
S
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as X
C necessary.*
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 138,000 141,000 144,000 147,000 150,000 N
(Kilometers) (230 000) (235 000) (240 000) (245 000) (250 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re- X X X X X N
placed at 3 months. A
N
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. * X S
Replace the spark plugs. X C
Change the manual transaxle fluid.† X H
E
Replace the Make-up air filter. X D
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *‡ X U
L
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer L This maintenance is required only for police, taxi, E
S
to the owner, but is not required to maintain the emis- limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
sions warranty. 8
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced. a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
M 448 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
A
I SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
N
T Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000
E
N (Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
A [Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
E Rotate tires. X X X X X X
S Inspect the brake linings. X X
C Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X
H
E Replace the spark plugs. X
D Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
U
L Replace the Make-up air filter. X
E Adjust the generator drive belt tension X
S
8
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 449 M
A
I
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 N
(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000) T
E
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X A
N
Rotate tires. X X X X X C
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X S
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X C
H
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X E
Inspect the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.* X D
U
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months, if X L
not done at 102,000 miles. E
Replace the Make-up air filter. X S
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X 8
A
I
N Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000
T (Kilometers) (120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
E
N [Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
N
C Rotate tires. X X X X X X
S Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X
H
E Replace the engine timing belt. * X
U
L Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
X
E Not required if previously changed. * ‡
S
Replace the Make-up air filter. X
8 Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not re-
X
placed at 60 months.
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 451 M
A
I
Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000 N
(Kilometers) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000) (210 000) (220 000) (230 000) T
E
[Months] [108] [114] [120] [126] [132] [138] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X A
N
Rotate tires. X X X X X X C
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. * ‡ X E
Replace the air cleaner filter. X S
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 C
X H
months, if not done at 102,000 miles. E
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X D
Replace the Make-up air filter. X U
L
E
S
8
A
I
N Miles 144,000 150,000
T (Kilometers) (240 000) (250 000)
E
N [Months] [144] [150]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X
N
C Rotate tires. X X
E Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. * ‡ X
S Replace the air cleaner filter. X
C
H * This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
E to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis- a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
D sions warranty. ceipts.
U
L ‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
E
S
8
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 453 M
A
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO I
N
Miles 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 T
E
(Kilometers) (8 000) (16 000) (24 000) (32 000) (40 000) (48 000) N
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36] A
N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X C
Rotate tires. X X X X X X E
Inspect the brake linings. X S
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X C
H
Replace the spark plugs. X E
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X D
U
Replace the Make-up air filter. X L
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X E
S
8
M 454 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
A
I
N Miles 35,000 40,000 45,000 50,000 55,000
T (Kilometers) (56 000) (64 000) (72 000) (80 000) (88 000)
E
N [Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
N
C Rotate tires. X X X X X
S Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if not
X
C replaced at 100,000 miles.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 60,000 65,000 70,000 75,000 80,000 85,000 N
(Kilometers) (96 000) (104 000) (112 000) (120 000) (128 000) (136 000) T
E
[Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X A
N
Rotate tires. X X X X X X C
Inspect the brake linings. X X E
H
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X E
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. D
X U
Not required if previously changed. * ‡ L
Replace the Make-up air filter. X E
S
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M 456 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
A
I
N Miles 90,000 95,000 100,000 105,000
T (Kilometers) (144 000) (156 000) (160 000) (168 000)
E
N [Months] [108] [114] [120] [126]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
N
C Rotate tires. X X X X
S Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X
H
E Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
U
L Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not required if
X
E previously changed. * ‡
S
Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months. X
8 Replace the Make-up air filter. X
Replace the engine timing belt. X
A
I
Miles 110,000 115,000 120,000 N
(Kilometers) (177 000) (185 000) (193 000) T
E
[Month] [132] [138] [144] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X A
N
Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary. * X E
H
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer E
WARNING! D
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis- U
sions warranty. You can be badly injured working on or around a L
E
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced. motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which S
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
8
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- service job, take your vehicle to a competent
ceipts. mechanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 464
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, 9
▫ DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Prepare For The Appointment
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to
service advisor know. your authorized selling dealer. They know you and your
vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt 9
and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to ensure your • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to your authorized
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 992-1997
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Cus- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
tomer Center. Phone: (800) 465–2001
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer In Mexico contact:
Center should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) In Mexico: (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico: (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Authorized dealership name
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
Impaired (TDD/TTY) tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
Service Contract to your contract documents, and contact the person listed
You may have purchased a service contract for your in those documents.
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s New Vehicle
when you purchased your vehicle. Your authorized
Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
dealer has also made a major investment in facilities,
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
delighted with your ownership experience. You’ll be
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
9
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
issues or related concerns.
date. If you have any questions about your service
MOPART PARTS
WARNING!
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain available from your authorized dealer. They will help
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals you keep your vehicle operating at its best.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod- In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
known to the State of California to cause cancer and cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
birth defects or other reproductive harm. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
this vehicle. campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), To order the following manuals, you may use either the
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. for an order form.
In Canada NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
• Service Manuals
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to: These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations information that students and professional technicians
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
3V9. maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia- 9
grams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call toll free at:

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia- • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Or
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, • www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as well as
specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES cantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
The following tire grading categories were established by service practices, and differences in road characteristics
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The and climate.
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
Traction Grades
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
your vehicle.
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
requirements in addition to these grades. on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
Treadwear
mance.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
WARNING!
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1-1/2 times as The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or 9
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and heat buildup and possible tire failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
INDEX
10
470 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 400 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 399,400,429,430
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 391 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 36
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393,394 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,393 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,90 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,291,294,408
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,101 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,104,116,234 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,103 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,100 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,32 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,295
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,233 Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
INDEX 471
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,404
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . 115
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,425
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 29,35 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Belts, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,247,248
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 429
Boot, Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,132 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Caps, Filler
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,379,387
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,404 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 10
472 INDEX
Cargo Compartment Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Cleaning
Carrier, Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,253,261
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,259 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 277 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,277 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235,238,248
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,247,248
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,107 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,111 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Convertible Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,132
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,112 Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
INDEX 473
Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 134,373
Cool Down, Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,105
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,430 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 400 Deck Lid (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Deck Lid, Emergency Release Latch (Convertible) . . 41
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Deck Lid, Power Release (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . 39
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,401 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,279
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Dipsticks
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Disposal
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . 390 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 10
474 INDEX
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 381,434

Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,378,379
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Driving Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,429,430
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 194 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Electronic Vehicle Information Center Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,379,387
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235,240 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Emergency Deck Lid Release Latch (Convertible) . . 41 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Emergency, In Case of Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . 40 Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
INDEX 475
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Fluid Level Checks

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,105 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,115,339,397 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,340 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 430
Filters Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,233
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Folding Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,430 Folding Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,430
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 10
476 INDEX
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,340 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,429
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Gauges
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,163,336
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,342,381
INDEX 477
Headlights Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,107

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,234 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,226
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 189 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,415
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Hitches Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 192
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 197 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,404 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,363
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Wiring System (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . 388
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,37 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 10
478 INDEX
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Keyless Entry System (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,233,426
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Latches High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 229
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,425 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,185
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,184 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,104,116,234 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
INDEX 479
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Maintenance Schedule
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,189,230,426 Schedule “A”-Non Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Schedule “A”-Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 226 Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Schedule “B”-All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Locks Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 229,381
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Manual Override, Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . 134,373
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,301,410
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,185
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 10
480 INDEX
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,429

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,464 Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,429
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Occupant Restraints (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,381
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,230 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
INDEX 481
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,465 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,394
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Panel Rear Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,32 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,431
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 168 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Pretensioners
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,88
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,114 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,33
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 317
Power Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 400
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,259,277
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 206 Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 10
482 INDEX
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,259 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173,175,177 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,78,107,112
Rear Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,107
Rear Shelf Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,105 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Remote Keyless Entry (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Seat Belts
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
INDEX 483
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 52 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173,175,177
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,107 Rear Folding (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82 Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,88 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,168
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,168
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,88 Tumbling Rear (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Seat Belts (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Tumbling Rear (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,37
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 40 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Folding Front Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,253,261
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 10
484 INDEX
Severe Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Steering

Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,394
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,100 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 285 Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,423
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,361 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . 55,90
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 194,229 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,292 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 226,359
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,111
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,292 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 317
INDEX 485
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,321,467 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,321
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,318 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 227,332 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 10
486 INDEX
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,35
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 197
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,33
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,114
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,291,294,408 Trunk Lid, Deck Lid (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Tumbling Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Turbo Cool Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,292,301 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,230
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Transmission Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 222
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
INDEX 487
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . ............. . 197 Washer, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . ............. . 337 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ............ 52,88 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . ............. . 413 Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,205
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,342 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,191
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,396
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 36 Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 414
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
2008 PT Cruiser Sedan/Convertible
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
PT Cruiser
Sedan/Convertible
81-026-0844 2nd Edition

First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

PT Cruiser: Owner'S Manual Sedan/Convertible

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PT Cruiser: Owner'S Manual Sedan/Convertible

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PT Cruiser: Owner'S Manual Sedan/Convertible

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 PT Cruiser Sedan/Convertible

81-026-0844 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS IGNITION KEY REMOVAL

KEY-IN-IGNITION REMINDER unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/

NOTE: Replacement Keys

NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage

POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

Child Lock Control

TRANSMITTER BATTERY SERVICE

Separating Transmitter Halves

To disarm the system:

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-

Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,

REAR WINDOW SWITCHES

AUTO DOWN FEATURE

To open the window part way, press the window switch

WIND BUFFETING • Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front

• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Removing Slack From Belt

Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock-Out

2. At about six to twelve inches (15 to 30 cm) above the

SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ENHANCED SEAT BELT REMINDER SYSTEM NOTE:

DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER

Front Panel SRS Features

Head/Thorax airbags (if equipped) are located inside the

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior

• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee impact

improved protection for the driver and front passenger.

The front airbag system consists of the following:

NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an

Passenger Airbag Disabled Light WARNING!

• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat

Maintaining Your Airbag System

Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING!

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply,

Airbag Light prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near-

• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped) CHILD RESTRAINT

• Safety experts recommend that children ride

that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle

rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

Removing Slack From Belt

A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and